3706 lines
		
	
	
		
			215 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			Plaintext
		
	
	
	
	
	
		
		
			
		
	
	
			3706 lines
		
	
	
		
			215 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			Plaintext
		
	
	
	
	
	
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 4,  Number 4, April, 1961
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. R. Herndon   ACM Algorithm 49: Spherical Neumann
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  179
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 5,  Number 12, December, 1962
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. N. Merner   ACM Algorithm 149: Complete Elliptic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  605
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 6,  Number 6, June, 1963
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   O. G. Ludwig   ACM Algorithm 179: Incomplete Beta Ratio  314
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 6,  Number 12, December, 1963
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. H. Kase   ACM Algorithm 219: Topological Ordering
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Pert Networks  . . . . . . . . . . . 738--739
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 7,  Number 8, August, 1964
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. Gautschi   ACM Algorithm 236: Bessel Functions of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the First Kind . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479--480
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 7,  Number 12, December, 1964
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. Boothroyd   ACM Algorithm 246: Graycode  . . . . . .  701
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 8,  Number 8, August, 1965
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. Gautschi   ACM Algorithm 259: Legendre Functions
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Arguments Larger than One  . . . . . 488--492
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 9,  Number 5, May, 1966
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. Fletcher   ACM Algorithm 284: Interchange of Two
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Blocks of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .  326
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 10,  Number 4, April, 1967
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 I. D. Hill and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     M. C. Pike   ACM Algorithm 299: Chi-Squared Integral  243--244
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 11,  Number 3, March, 1968
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Edsger Wybe Dijkstra   Go to statement considered harmful . . . 147--148
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 12,  Number 5, May, 1969
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         ANSI Subcommittee X3J3   Clarification of Fortran Standards ---
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Initial Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . 289--294
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 12,  Number 9, September, 1969
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       N. Wirth   On Multiprogramming, Machine Coding, and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Organization  . . . . . . . . . 489--498
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 1,  Number 11, November, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      V. Y. Lum   Multi-Attribute Retrieval with Combined
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Indexes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660--665
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 1, January, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     T. C. Lowe   Automatic segmentation of cyclic program
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  structures based on connectivity and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  processor timing . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--6
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Walter Gautschi and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Bruce J. Klein   Recursive computation of certain
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  derivatives --- A study of error
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  propagation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              A. P. Mullery and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 G. C. Driscoll   A processor allocation method for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  time-sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--14
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. F. Simmons   Natural Language Question-Answering
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems: 1969  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15--30
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    E. T. Irons   Experience with an extensible language   31--40
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   U. Montanari   A note on minimal length polygonal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  approximation to a digitized contour . . 41--47
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Harald Stehfest   ACM Algorithm 368: Numerical Inversion
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Laplace Transforms  . . . . . . . . . 47--49
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 H. E. Schaffer   ACM Algorithm 369: Generator of Random
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Numbers Satisfying the Poisson
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49--49
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   E. L. Butler   ACM Algorithm 370: General Random Number
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Generator  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49--52
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. K. S. McKay   ACM Algorithm 371: Partitions in Natural
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Order  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52--52
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   K. B. Dunham   ACM Algorithm 372: An Algorithm to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Produce Complex Primes CSIEVE  . . . . . 52--54
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. Griffin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   K. A. Redich   Remark on ``Algorithm 347 [M1]: An
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Efficient Algorithm for Sorting with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Minimal Storage'', by R. C. Singleton    54--54
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Anonymous   Representation for calendar date for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  machine-to-machine data interchange  . . 55--55
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Anonymous   Interchange rolls of perforated tape for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  information interchange  . . . . . . . . 56--56
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. H. Payne   Fortran Tausworthe pseudorandom number
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  generator  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57--57
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 2, February, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             David K. Hsiao and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Frank D. Harary   A Formal System for Information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Retrieval from Files . . . . . . . . . . 67--73
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          E. von Glaserfeld and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   P. P. Pisani   The multistore parser for hierarchical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  syntactic structures . . . . . . . . . . 74--82
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Steven Vere   Translation equations  . . . . . . . . . 83--89
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. L. Morgan   Spelling correction in systems programs  90--94
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      J. Earley   An Efficient Context-Free Parsing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithm  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94--102
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    C. E. Radke   The Use of Quadratic Residue Research    103--105
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       B. Jones   A Variation on Sorting by Address
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Calculation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105--107
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  James R. Bell   The Quadratic Quotient Method: A Hash
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Code Eliminating Secondary Clustering    107--109
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 D. N. Ness and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. S. Green and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               W. A. Martin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. A. Moulton   Computer education in a graduate school
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of management  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110--114, 19
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              M. F. Robbins and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. D. Beyer   An interactive computer system using
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  graphical flowchart input  . . . . . . . 115--119
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. S. White   ACM Algorithm 373: Number of Doubly
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Restricted Partitions  . . . . . . . . . 120--120
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. S. White   ACM Algorithm 374: Restricted Partition
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Generator  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120--120
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       H. Spath   ACM Algorithm 375: Fitting Data to One
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Exponential  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120--121
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       H. Spath   Fitting data to one exponential  . . . . 120--121
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       H. Spath   ACM Algorithm 376: Least Squares Fit by
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  $f(x)=A\cos(Bx+C)$ . . . . . . . . . . . 121--122
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 3, March, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. L. Morgan   Spelling correction in systems programs  90--94
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             R. R. Fenichel and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              J. Weizenbaum and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. C. Yochelson   A Program to Teach Programming . . . . . 141--146
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. R. Slagle and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. K. Dixon   Experiments with the M & N
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Tree-Searching Program . . . . . . . . . 147--154, 159
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  A. Batson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Shy-Ming M. Ju and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     D. C. Wood   Measurements of Segment Size . . . . . . 155--159
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   G. A. Watson   On an Algorithm for Nonlinear Minimax
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Approximation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160--162
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. G. Schweikert   A Comparison of Error Improvement
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Estimates for Adaptive Trapezoid
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Integration  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163--166
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Robert M. Schwarcz and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             John F. Burger and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Robert F. Simmons   A Deductive Question Answerer for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Natural Language Inference . . . . . . . 167--183
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             A. F. Cardenas and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  W. J. Karplus   PDEL, a Language for Partial
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Differential Equations . . . . . . . . . 184--191 (or 184--190??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               M. J. Levine and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  S. M. Swanson   ACM Algorithm 377: Symbolic Expansion of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algebraic Expressions  . . . . . . . . . 191--192
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   M. V. Kailas   Another method of converting from
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  hexadecimal to decimal . . . . . . . . . 193--193
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       D. Pager   A number system for the permutations . . 193--193
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              J. R. H. Dempster   Comment on a Paging Anomaly  . . . . . . 193--194
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. A. Maurer   A Note on the Complement of Inherently
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Ambiguous Context-Free Languages . . . . 194--194
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                D. K. Hsiao and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   F. D. Harary   Corrigenda: ``A Formal System for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Information Retrieval from Files'' . . . 266--266
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 4, April, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             A. J. DeSalvio and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. G. Purdy and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                         J. Rau   Creation and Control of Internal Data
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Bases Under a Fortran Programming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Environment  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211--215
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    H. D. Mills   Syntax-Directed Documentation for PL360  216--222
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Rudolf Bayer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Christoph Witzgall   Some Complete Calculi for Matrices . . . 223--237
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               P. Brinch Hansen   The Nucleus of a Multiprogramming System 238--241, 250
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  C. M. Eastman   Representations for Space Planning . . . 242--250
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             J. E. Pomeranz and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. L. Weil, Jr.   The cyclical majority problem  . . . . . 251--254
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   E. N. Nilson   Cubic Splines on Uniform Meshes  . . . . 255--258
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  W. Pankiewicz   ACM Algorithm 378: Discretized
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Newton-like Method for Solving a System
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Simultaneous Nonlinear Equations  . . 259--260
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. N. Lyness   ACM Algorithm 379: SQUANK (Simpson
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Quadrature Used Adaptively-Noise Killed) 260--263 (or 260--262??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               W. F. Heess, Jr.   Comments on a paper by Wallace and Mason 264--265
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. L. Smith   Comment on multiprogramming under a page
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  on demand strategy . . . . . . . . . . . 265--265
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Ronald C. de Vries   Comment on Lawler's Multilevel Boolean
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  minimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265--266
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   K. R. Knight   An Algol construction for procedures as
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  parameters of procedures . . . . . . . . 266--266
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       N. Wirth   Corrigenda: ``On Multiprogramming,
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Machine Coding, and Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Organization'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266--266
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 5, May, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       L. Hodes   Programming System for the On-Line
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Analysis of Biomedical Images  . . . . . 279--283, 286
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   G. A. Sitton   Operations on Generalized Arrays with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the Genie Compiler . . . . . . . . . . . 284--286
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        S. Vere   Translation Equations (Errata) . . . . . 286--286
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               W. E. Sasser and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              D. S. Burdick and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. A. Graham and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   T. H. Naylor   Application of Sequential Sampling to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Simulation. an Example Inventory Model   287--296
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      J. Loeckx   Algorithm for the Construction of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Bounded-Context Parsers  . . . . . . . . 297--307
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               John C. Reynolds   GEDANKEN --- A Simple Typeless Language
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Based on the Principle of Completeness
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and the Reference Concept  . . . . . . . 308--319
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         S. Crespi-Reghizzi and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. Morpurgo   A language for treating graphs . . . . . 319--323
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  S. Laflin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  M. A. Brebner   ACM Algorithm 380: In-situ Transposition
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of a Rectangular Matrix  . . . . . . . . 324--326 (or 324--325??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. E. Knop   ACM Algorithm 381: Random Vectors
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Uniform In Solid Angle . . . . . . . . . 326--326
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 6, June, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    H. A. Elder   On the Feasibility of Voice Input to an
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  On-Line Computer Processing System . . . 339--346
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        C. R. Muthukrishnan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   V. Rajaraman   On the Conversion of Decision Tables to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Programs  . . . . . . . . . . . 347--351
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. E. Grimes   Scheduling to Reduce Conflict in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351--352
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. G. Frantz   A PL\slash 1 program to assist the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  comparative linguist . . . . . . . . . . 353--356
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  F. J. Damerau   Automatic Parsing for Content Analysis   356--360
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Peter Linz   Accurate Floating-Point Summation  . . . 361--362
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                K. E. Hillstrom   Comparison of Several Adaptive
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Newton-Cotes Quadrature Routines in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Evaluating Definite Integrals with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Peaked Integrands  . . . . . . . . . . . 362--365
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. W. Stewart   Incorporating Origin Shifts into the QR
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithm for Symmetric Tridiagonal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365--367
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    P. J. Chase   ACM Algorithm 382: Combinations of ${M}$
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Out of ${N}$ Objects . . . . . . . . . . 368--368
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    P. J. Chase   ACM Algorithm 383: Permutations of a Set
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  with Repetitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 368--369
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. W. Stewart   ACM Algorithm 384: Eigenvalues and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Eigenvectors of a Real Symmetric Matrix
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  [F2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369--371
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. L. London   Certification of Algorithm 245 (M1)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Treesort 3: Proof of Algorithms --- A
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  New Kind of Certification  . . . . . . . 371--374
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             J. P. Chandler and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 W. C. Harrison   R201--SHELLSORT  . . . . . . . . . . . . 373--374
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     E. F. Codd   A Relational Model of Data for Large
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Shared Data Banks  . . . . . . . . . . . 377--387
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 7, July, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    C. A. Grant   An interactive command generating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403--406
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   M. A. Wilkes   Conversational Access to a 2048-Word
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Machine  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407--414
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. M. Waite   The mobile programming system: STAGE 2   415--421
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Burton H. Bloom   Space/Time Trade-offs in Hash Coding
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  with Allowable Errors  . . . . . . . . . 422--426
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         E. G. Coffman, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                         J. Eve   File Structures Using Hashing Functions  427--432, 436
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Gordon H. Bradley   Algorithm and Bound for the Greatest
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Common Divisor of $n$ Integers . . . . . 433--436
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. A. Woods   Context-Sensitive Parsing  . . . . . . . 437--445
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 K. A. Paciorek   ACM Algorithm 385: Exponential Integral
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  ${E}_i(x)$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446--447
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. H. Bradley   ACM Algorithm 386: Greatest Common
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Divisor of $n$ Integers and Multipliers  447--448
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 K. Sattley and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. Millstein   Comments on a paper by Lowe  . . . . . . 450--451
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. D. Baecker   A note on data base deadlocks  . . . . . 451--451
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. E. Pomeranz   Note on an Anomaly in Paging . . . . . . 451--451
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     B. R. Hunt   A Comment on Axiomatic Approaches to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452--452
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 8, August, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  N. R. Nielsen   Allocation of Computer Resources. is
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Pricing the Answer . . . . . . . . . . . 467--474
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    G. Nagy and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       N. Tuong   Normalization Techniques for Handprinted
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Numerals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475--481
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      A. C. Day   Full Table Quadratic Searching for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Scatter Storage  . . . . . . . . . . . . 481--482
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                B. S. Brawn and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            F. G. Gustavson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   E. S. Mankin   Sorting in a Paging Environment  . . . . 483--494
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              J. H. Saltzer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. W. Gintell   The instrumentation of Multics . . . . . 495--500
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              J. D. Ichbiah and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. P. Morse   A technique for generating almost
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  optimal Floyd-Evans productions for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  precedence grammars  . . . . . . . . . . 501--508
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    K. Fielding   ACM Algorithm 387: Function Minimization
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and Linear Search  . . . . . . . . . . . 509--510
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. Hubner and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. Kremer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 K. O. Linn and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. Schwering   ACM Algorithm 388: Rademacher Function   510--511
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. Hubner and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. Kremer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 K. O. Linn and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. Schwering   ACM Algorithm 389: Binary Ordered Walsh
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511--511
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. Hubner and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. Kremer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 K. O. Linn and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. Schwering   ACM Algorithm 390: Sequency Ordered
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Walsh Functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . 511--512 (or 511--511??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       J. McKay   ACM Algorithm 391: Unitary Symmetric
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Polynomials  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512--512
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Anonymous   Identification of States of the United
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  States (including the District of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Columbia) for information interchange    514--515
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 9, September, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              W. Jack Bouknight   A Procedure for Generation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Three-Dimensional Half-Toned Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Graphics Presentations . . . . . . . . . 527--536
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 G. Bracchi and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   M. Somalvico   Interactive Software System for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer-Aided Design. an Application to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Circuit Project  . . . . . . . . . . . . 537--545
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  I. Hirschsohn   AMESPLOT, a Higher Level Data Plotting
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Software System  . . . . . . . . . . . . 546--555
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Cleve B. Moler and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Louis P. Solomon   Integrating Square Roots . . . . . . . . 556--557
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   G. W. Kimble   A Variation of the Goodman-Lance Method
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for the Solution of Two-Point Boundary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Value Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557--558
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                M. Wayne Wilson   Optimal Starting Approximations for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Generating Square Root for Slow or No
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559--561 (or 559--560??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  L. W. Ehrlich   Complex Matrix Inversion Versus Real . . 561--562
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                M. H. van Emden   Increasing the Efficiency of Quicksort   563--567 (or 563--566??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Robert R. Smith and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Dennis McCall   ACM Algorithm 392: Systems of Hyperbolic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  P.D.E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567--570
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   S. K. Abdali   ACM Algorithm 393: Special Series
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Summation with Arbitrary Precision . . . 570--570
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. B. Dial   ACM Algorithm 394: Decision Table
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Translation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571--573 (or 571--572??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Leslie Lamport and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     J. R. Bell   Comment on Bell's Quadratic Quotient
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Method for Hash Code Searching . . . . . 573--574
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       Z. Bavel   On the Number of Automorphisms of a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Singly Generated Automaton . . . . . . . 574--575
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 10, October, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. A. Woods   Transition Network Grammars for Natural
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Language Analysis  . . . . . . . . . . . 591--606
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. Earley and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     H. Sturgis   A formalism for translator interactions  607--617
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     G. W. Hill   ACM Algorithm 395: Student's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  $t$-Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . 617--619
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     G. W. Hill   ACM Algorithm 396: Student's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  $t$-Quantiles  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619--620
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                S. K. Chang and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        A. Gill   ACM Algorithm 397: An Integer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming Problem  . . . . . . . . . . 620--621
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. A. Stone   ACM Algorithm 398: Tableless Date
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621--621
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. J. Seppanen   ACM Algorithm 399: Spanning Tree . . . . 621--622
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. C. Wallick   ACM Algorithm 400: Modified Havie
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Integration  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622--624
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        R. Peto   Remark on ``Algorithm 347 [M1]: An
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Efficient Algorithm for Sorting with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Minimal Storage''  . . . . . . . . . . .  624
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    L. B. Smith   The use of interactive graphics to solve
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  numerical problems . . . . . . . . . . . 625--634
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 11, November, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  P. LaFata and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. B. Rosen   An interactive display for approximation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  by linear programming  . . . . . . . . . 651--659
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      V. Y. Lum   Multi-attribute retrieval with combined
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  indexes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660--665
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   C. J. Mifsud   A multiple-precision division algorithm  666--668
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  K. Conrow and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. G. Smith   NEATER2: A PL/I Source Statement
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Reformatter  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669--675
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              James R. Bell and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Charles H. Kaman   The Linear Quotient Hash Code  . . . . . 675--677
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   C. J. Cheney   A Nonrecursive List Compacting Algorithm 677--678
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Anonymous   Proposed American National Standard.
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Recorded magnetic tape for information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  interchange (1600 CPI, phase encoded)    679--685
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Anonymous   Proposed American National Standard.
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Unrecorded magnetic tape for information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  interchange (9 track-200 and 800 CPI,
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  NRZI and 1600 CPI, P.E.) . . . . . . . . 686--692
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     P. Bratley   ACM Algorithm 401: An Improved Algorithm
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  to Produce Complex Primes  . . . . . . . 693--693
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                M. H. van Emden   ACM Algorithm 402: Increasing the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Efficiency of Quicksort  . . . . . . . . 693--694
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. J. Wilson   A generalized method for generating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  argument/function values . . . . . . . . 696--697
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. R. Ehrman   Correction to 'logical' arithmetic on
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computers with two's complement binary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697--698
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   A. Bernstein   Comment on the working set model for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  program behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . 698--699
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       J. Rokne   Condition numbers of Pei matrices  . . . 699--699
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 13,  Number 12, December, 1970
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              M. V. Mathews and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    F. R. Moore   GROOVE-A program to compose, store, and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  edit functions of time . . . . . . . . . 715--721
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               James C. Tiernan   An Efficient Search Algorithm to Find
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the Elementary Circuits of a Graph . . . 722--726
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                C. Betourne and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. Boulenger and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. Ferrie and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  C. Kaiser and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               S. Krakowiak and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. Mossiere   Process management and resource sharing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in the multiaccess system ESOPE  . . . . 727--733
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. L. Morgan   An interrupt based organization for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  management information systems . . . . . 734--739
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. J. Thompson   Improving round-off in Runge-Kutta
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computations with Gill's method  . . . . 739--740
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  S. C. Shapiro   The list set generator: a construct for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  evaluating set expressions . . . . . . . 741--744
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    N. A. Black   Optimum Merging from Mass Storage  . . . 745--749
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. W. Stewart   Errata: ACM Algorithm 384: Eigenvalues
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and Eigenvectors of a Real Symmetric
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Matrix [F2]  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750--750
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                E. A. Fuchs and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  P. E. Jackson   Estimates of Distributions of Random
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Variables for Certain Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Communications Traffic Models  . . . . . 752--757
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   C. C. Pinter   On decomposing a Boolean function and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  simplifying the components separately    758--758
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 W. J. Raduchel   Efficient handling of binary data  . . . 758--759
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Robert A. Wagner   Finiteness Assumptions and Intellectual
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Isolation of Computer Scientists . . . . 759--760
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 12,  Number 1, January, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   E. Lowry and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  C. W. Medlock   Object Code Optimization . . . . . . . . 13--22
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Carl Hammer   Signature Simulation and Certain
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Cryptographic Codes  . . . . . . . . . . 3--14
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     A. Klinger   Pattern width at a given angle . . . . . 15--20
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Shi-Kuo Chang   The Reconstruction of Binary Patterns
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  from Their Projections . . . . . . . . . 21--25
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 G. Bracchi and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     D. Ferrari   Language for Treating Geometric Patterns
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in a Two-Dimensional Space . . . . . . . 26--32
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. A. Broucke   Construction of rational and negative
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  powers of a formal series  . . . . . . . 32--35
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. C. Holt   Comments on Prevention of System
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Deadlocks  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36--38
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. A. R. Hoare   Proof of a Program: FIND . . . . . . . . 39--45
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    L. G. Proll   Further evidence for the analysis of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  algorithms for the zero-one programming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  problem  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46--47
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              M. W. Coleman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   M. S. Taylor   ACM Algorithm 403: Circular Integer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48--48
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           C. W. Lucas, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  C. W. Terrill   ACM Algorithm 404: Complex Gamma
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48--49 (or 48--48??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   K. A. Redish   Comment on London's Certification of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithm 245  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50--51
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  S. L. Pollack   Comment on the conversion of decision
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  tables to computer programs  . . . . . . 52--52
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 2, February, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   K. Schwayder   Conversion of Limited-Entry Decision
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Tables to Computer Programs. a Proposed
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Modification to Pollack's Algorithm  . . 69--73
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    K. Shwayder   Conversion of limited-entry decision
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  tables to computer programs-a proposed
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  modification to Pollack's algorithm  . . 69--73
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            A. J. Bernstein and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. C. Sharp   A policy-driven scheduler for a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  time-sharing system  . . . . . . . . . . 74--78
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  N. R. Nielsen   An analysis of some time-sharing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79--90
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. R. Slagle and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  C. D. Farrell   Experiments in Automatic Learning for a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Multipurpose Heuristic Program . . . . . 91--99 (or 91--98??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                H. Hurwitz, Jr.   On the Probability Distribution of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Values of Binary Trees . . . . . . . . . 99--102
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. R. Slagle and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. C. T. Lee   Application of Game Tree Searching
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Techniques to Sequential Pattern
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Recognition  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103--110
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. Rokne and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   P. Lancaster   Complex Interval Arithmetic  . . . . . . 111--112
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 A. M. Dell and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. L. Weil and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 G. L. Thompson   ACM Algorithm 405: Roots of Matrix
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Pencils: The Generalized Eigenvalue
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Problem  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113--117
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 3, March, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     A. M. Noll   Scanned-Display Computer Graphics  . . . 143--150
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Z. Manna and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. J. Waldinger   Toward Automatic Program Synthesis . . . 151--165
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  W. K. Winters   Scheduling Algorithm for a Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Assisted Registration System . . . . . . 166--171
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. G. Williams   Storage Utilization in a Memory
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Hierarchy When Storage Assignment is
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Performed by a Hashing Algorithm . . . . 172--175
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     C. W. Gear   The Automatic Integration of Ordinary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Differential Equations . . . . . . . . . 176--179
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. A. Howell   ACM Algorithm 406: Exact Solution of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Linear Equations Using Residue
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180--184
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     C. W. Gear   ACM Algorithm 407: DIFSUB for Solution
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Ordinary Differential Equations . . . 185--190
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 4, April, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       N. Wirth   Program Development by Stepwise
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221--227
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  V. Y. Lum and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              P. S. T. Yuen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        M. Dodd   Key-to-Address Transform Techniques: A
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Fundamental Performance Study on Large
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Existing Formatted Files . . . . . . . . 228--239
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               A. B. Tucker and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    M. J. Flynn   Dynamic Microprogramming. Processor
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Organization and Programming . . . . . . 240--250
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               P. A. Talbot and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. W. Carr and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         R. R. Coulter, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. C. Hwang   Animator: an on-line two-dimensional
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  film animation system  . . . . . . . . . 251--259
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                M. L. Stein and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. D. Munro   On Complement Division . . . . . . . . . 260--264
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. M. McNamee   ACM Algorithm 408: A Sparse Matrix
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Package (Part I) . . . . . . . . . . . . 265--273
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 5, May, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								 T. William Olle (Chairman) and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								      Codasyl Systems Committee   Introduction to `Feature analysis of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  generalized data base management
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  systems' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308--318
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  N. R. Nielsen   The merit of regional computing networks 319--326
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  P. Krolak and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. Felts and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      G. Marble   A Man-Machine Approach Toward Solving
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the Traveling Salesman Problem . . . . . 327--334
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Ugo Montanari   On the optimal detection of curves in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  noisy pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335--345
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 D. L. Richards   How to Keep the Addresses Short  . . . . 346--349
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. R. Fenichel   On Implementation of Label Variables . . 349--350
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           James H. Morris, Jr.   Another Recursion Induction Principle    351--354
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     H. Schmitt   ACM Algorithm 409: Discrete Chebychev
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Curve Fit  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355--356
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. M. Chambers   ACM Algorithm 410: Partial Sorting [M1]  357--358
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 6, June, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Kazuaki Harada   Generation of rosary permutations
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  expressed in Hamiltonian circuits  . . . 373--379
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. D. Foley   An approach to the optimum design of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computer graphics systems  . . . . . . . 380--390
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      S. Amarel   Computer Science: A Conceptual Framework
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Curriculum Planning  . . . . . . . . 391--401
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         W. E. Bosarge, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  O. G. Johnson   Numerical properties of the Ritz-Trefftz
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  algorithm for optimal control  . . . . . 402--406
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 H. Tim Gladwin   A Note on Compiling Fixed Point Binary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Multiplications  . . . . . . . . . . . . 407--408
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   A. G. Fraser   On the Meaning of Names in Programming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409--416
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. J. Walker   Binary summation . . . . . . . . . . . . 417--417
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   M. Zelkowitz   Interrupt driven programming . . . . . . 417--418
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 7, July, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             J. L. McKenney and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    F. M. Tonge   The State of Computer-Oriented Curricula
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in Business Schools 1970 . . . . . . . . 443--448
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                A. J. Bernstein   A programmer training project  . . . . . 449--452
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Franklin L. DeRemer   Simple LR(k) grammars  . . . . . . . . . 453--460
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Terrence W. Pratt and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Daniel P. Friedman   A Language Extension for Graph
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Processing, and Its Formal Semantics . . 460--467 (or 461--467??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Keith Paton   An algorithm for the blocks and cut
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  nodes of a graph . . . . . . . . . . . . 468--475
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 D. E. Ferguson   Buffer Allocation in Merge-Sorting . . . 476--478
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          C. V. Ramamoorthy and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 M. J. Gonzalez   Subexpression ordering in the execution
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of arithmetic expressions  . . . . . . . 479--485
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              D. G. McVitie and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   L. B. Wilson   The Stable Marriage Problem  . . . . . . 486--490
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              D. G. McVitie and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   L. B. Wilson   ACM Algorithm 411: Three Procedures for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the Stable Marriage Problem  . . . . . . 491--492
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. \vCermak   ACM Algorithm 412: Graph Plotter . . . . 492--493
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 8, August, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Anonymous   Papers from the 2nd symposium on
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  symbolic and algebraic manipulation  . .   ??
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Anthony C. Hearn   Applications of Symbolic Manipulation in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Theoretical Physics  . . . . . . . . . . 511--516
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                A. D. Hall, Jr.   The Altran system for rational function
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  manipulation --- a survey  . . . . . . . 517--521
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Robert R. Fenichel   List Tracing in Systems Allowing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Multiple Cell Types  . . . . . . . . . . 522--526
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       J. Moses   Algebraic Simplification: A Guide for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the Perplexed  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527--537
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 W. H. Jefferys   Automatic algebraic manipulation in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  celestial mechanics  . . . . . . . . . . 538--541
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  D. Barton and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. P. Fitch   General relativity and the application
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of algebraic manipulative systems  . . . 542--547
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Joel Moses   Symbolic Integration: The Stormy Decade  548--560
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 9, September, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Daniel Teichroew   Education Related to the Use of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computers in Organizations . . . . . . . 573--588
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Sadahiro Isoda and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Eiichi Goto and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Izumi Kimura   An Efficient Bit Table Technique for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Dynamic Storage Allocation of $2^n$-word
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589--592
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Keith Paton   Corrigendum: ``An algorithm for the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  blocks and cutnodes of a graph'' . . . . 592--592
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Eugene Wong and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   T. C. Chiang   Canonical Structure in Attribute Based
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  File Organization  . . . . . . . . . . . 593--597
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              David L. Phillips   A note on best one-sided approximations  598--600
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     W. Liniger   A stopping criterion for the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Newton-Raphson method in implicit
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  multistep integration algorithms for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  nonlinear systems of ordinary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  differential equations . . . . . . . . . 600--601
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Ivan Flores and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  George Madpis   Average Binary Search Length for Dense
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Ordered Lists  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602--603
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. R. Fenichel   Comment on Cheney's List-Compaction
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithm  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603--604
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 10, October, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Jay Earley   Toward an Understanding of Data
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617--627
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         ANSI Subcommittee X3J3   Clarification of Fortran Standards ---
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Second Report  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628--642
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            A. E. Oldehoeft and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. D. Conte   Experiments with an automated
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  instructional system for numerical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  methods  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643--650
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. M. Newman   Display procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 651--660
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               A. G. Nemeth and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   P. D. Rovner   User program measurement in a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  time-shared environment  . . . . . . . . 661--666
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             P. J. Courtois and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 F. Heymans and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. L. Parnas   Concurrent Control with `Readers' and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  `Writers'  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667--668
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. N. Lyness and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       G. Sande   ACM Algorithm 413: ENTCAF and ENTCRE:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Evaluation of Normalized Taylor
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Coefficients of an Analytic Function
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  (C5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669--675
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 11, November, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               P. Branquart and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. Lewi and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                M. Sintzoff and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    P. L. Wodon   The composition of semantics in Algol 68 697--708
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. W. Hamblen   Using computers in higher education:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  past recommendations, status, and needs  709--712
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    D. L. Shell   Optimizing the Polyphase Sort  . . . . . 713--719
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 I. Aramaki and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                T. Kawabata and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     K. Arimoto   Automation of etching-pattern layout . . 720--730
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Michael A. Malcolm   On Accurate Floating-Point Summation . . 731--736
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                G. H. Golub and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    L. B. Smith   ACM Algorithm 414: Chebyshev
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Approximation of Continuous Functions by
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  a Chebyshev System of Functions  . . . . 737--746
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 14,  Number 12, December, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. Gordon and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   G. T. Herman   Reconstruction of Pictures from Their
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Projections  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759--768
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               E. L. Amidon and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     G. S. Akin   Algorithmic Selection of the Best Method
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Compressing Map Data Strings . . . . 769--774
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                James K. Mullin   Retrieval-Update Speed Trade-offs Using
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Combined Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . 775--776
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 M. C. Harrison   Implementation of the Substring Test by
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Hashing  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777--779
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 W. A. Wulf and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              D. B. Russell and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                A. N. Habermann   BLISS: A language for systems
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  programming  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780--790
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    A. Rochfeld   New LISP Techniques for a Paging
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Environment  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791--795
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             J. W. Blumberg and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    C. R. Foulk   A note on `a modification of Nordsieck's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  method using an ``off-step'' point'  . . 796--796
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Sven-\AAke A. Gustafson   Rapid Computation of General
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Interpolation Formulas and Mechanical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Quadrature Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . 797--801
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       Fran\ccois Bourgeois and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Jean-Claude Lassalle   An extension of the Munkres algorithm
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for the assignment problem to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  rectangular matrices . . . . . . . . . . 802--804
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               F. Bourgeois and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. C. Lassalle   ACM Algorithm 415: Algorithm for the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Assignment Problem (Rectangular
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Matrices)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805--806
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Sven-\AAke Gustafson   ACM Algorithm 416: Rapid Computation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Coefficients of Interpolation Formulas
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  [E1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806--807
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Sven-\AAke Gustafson   ACM Algorithm 417: Rapid Computation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Weights of Interpolatory Quadrature
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Rules [D1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807--807
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 1, January, 1971
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  A. V. Aho and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              P. J. Denning and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. D. Ullman   Principles of optimal page replacement   80--93
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 5,  Number 6, June, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              S. C. Johnson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                B. W. Kernighan   Remark on ``CACM Algorithm 397'' . . . .  469
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 8,  Number 9, September, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              R. H. Bartels and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. W. Stewart   Algorithm 432: The Solution of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Matrix Equation $AX -+BX = C$  . . . . . 820--826
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 1, January, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     A. M. Lesk   Pictorial pattern recognition and the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  phase problem of X-ray crystallography   3--6
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. Levialdi   On Shrinking Binary Picture Patterns . . 7--10
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. O. Duda and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     P. E. Hart   Use of the Hough transformation to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  detect lines and curves in pictures  . . 11--15
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                E. T. Irons and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   F. M. Djorup   A CRT editing system . . . . . . . . . . 16--20
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    T. A. Dwyer   Teacher/student authored CAI using the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  NEWBASIC system  . . . . . . . . . . . . 21--28
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Donald L. Shell   Corrigendum: ``Optimizing the Polyphase
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Sort'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28--28
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              G. I. McCalla and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. R. Sampson   MUSE: A Model to Understand Simple
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  English  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29--40
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. I. Shrager   Quadratic programming for nonlinear
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  regression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41--45
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. E. Salzer   Ordering
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  +or-f(+or-f(+or-f(\ldots+or-f(x)\ldots))) when f(x) is positive monotonic  45--46
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   B. Einarsson   ACM Algorithm 418: Calculation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Fourier Integrals  . . . . . . . . . . . 47--48
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 2, February, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    David Pager   A Proposal for a Computer-Based
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Interactive Scientific Community . . . . 71--75
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  C. M. Eastman   Preliminary report on a system for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  general space planning . . . . . . . . . 76--87
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               W. A. Martin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     D. N. Ness   Optimizing Binary Trees Grown with a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Storing Algorithm  . . . . . . . . . . . 88--93
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            A. E. Oldehoeft and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 M. H. Halstead   Maximum computing power and cost factors
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in the centralization problem  . . . . . 94--96
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              M. A. Jenkins and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. F. Traub   ACM Algorithm 419: Zeros of a Complex
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Polynomial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97--99
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. Williamson   ACM Algorithm 420: Hidden-Line Plotting
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Program  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100--103
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. A. Moorer   Music and computer composition . . . . . 104--113
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Ivan Flores and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  George Madpis   Corrigendum: ``Average Binary Search
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Length for Dense Ordered Lists'' . . . . 113--113
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Richard Gordon and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Gabor T. Herman   Corrigendum: ``Reconstruction of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Pictures from Their Projections''  . . . 113--113
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 3, March, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Anonymous   Papers from the 3rd ACM symposium on
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  operating systems principles . . . . . .   ??
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. G. Bobrow and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            J. D. Burchfiel and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. L. Murphy and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. S. Tomlinson   TENEX, A Paged Time-Sharing System for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the PDP-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135--143
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   B. H. Liskov   The Design of the Venus Operating System 144--149
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              R. Stockton Gains   An operating system based on the concept
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of a supervisory computer  . . . . . . . 150--156
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       Michael D. Schroeder and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jerome H. Saltzer   A Hardware Architecture for Implementing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Protection Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . 157--170
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              A. Nico Habermann   Synchronization of Communicating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Processes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171--176
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Toby J. Teorey and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Tad B. Pinkerton   A Comparative Analysis of Disk
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Scheduling Policies  . . . . . . . . . . 177--184
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         E. G. Coffman, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                T. A. Ryan, Jr.   A study of storage partitioning using a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  mathematical model of locality . . . . . 185--190
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Peter J. Denning and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Stuart C. Schwartz   Properties of the working-set model  . . 191--198
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 4, April, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               R. W. Conway and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              W. L. Maxwell and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. L. Morgan   On the Implementation of Security
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Measures in Information Systems  . . . . 211--220
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. C. Walden   A system for interprocess communication
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in a resource sharing computer network   221--230
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               N. M. Herbst and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     P. M. Will   An experimental laboratory for pattern
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  recognition and signal processing  . . . 231--244
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Yutaka Matsushita   Hidden lines elimination for a rotating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245--252
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. M. Chase   An implemented graph algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  winning Shannon Switching Games  . . . . 253--256
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                E. Horowitz and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               H. L. Morgan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     A. C. Shaw   Computers and Society: A Proposed Course
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Computer Scientists  . . . . . . . . 257--261
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        H. Kuki   Complex gamma function with error
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  control  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262--267
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    C. B. Moler   Matrix Computations with Fortran and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268--270
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Hirondo Kuki   ACM Algorithm 421: Complex Gamma
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Function with Error Control  . . . . . . 271--272
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               V. K. M. Whitney   ACM Algorithm 422: Minimal Spanning Tree 273--274
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    C. B. Moler   ACM Algorithm 423: Linear Equation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274--274
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. C. Walden   A Note on Cheney's Nonrecursive
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  List-Compacting Algorithm  . . . . . . . 275--275
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       T. C. Hu   A Comment on the Double-Chained Tree . . 276--276
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 5, May, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                James K. Mullin   An Improved Indexed-Sequential Access
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Method Using Hashed Overflow . . . . . . 301--307
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              A. Bensoussan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              C. T. Clingen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. C. Daley   The Multics Virtual Memory: Concepts and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308--318
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. D. Christman   MUX, a simple approach to on-line
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computing  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319--329
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                David L. Parnas   A technique for software module
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  specification with examples  . . . . . . 330--336
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            W. Morven Gentleman   Implementing Clenshaw-Curtis quadrature.
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  I. Methodology and experience  . . . . . 337--342
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            W. Morvin Gentleman   Implementing Clenshaw-Curtis quadrature.
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  II. Computing the cosine transformation  343--346
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. Greenspan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     D. Schultz   Fast finite-difference solution of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  biharmonic problems  . . . . . . . . . . 347--350
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   C. B. Dunham   Minimax nonlinear approximation by
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  approximation on subsets . . . . . . . . 351--351
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Richard Harter   The Optimality of Winograd's Formula . . 352--352
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                W. M. Gentleman   ACM Algorithm 424: Clenshaw-Curtis
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Quadrature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353--355
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. L. Hurst and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. E. Knop   ACM Algorithm 425: Generation of Random
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Correlated Normal Variables  . . . . . . 355--357
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        C. Bron   ACM Algorithm 426: Merge Sort Algorithm  357--358
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        P. Linz   ACM Algorithm 427: Fourier Cosine
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358--360
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     J. M. Yohe   ACM Algorithm 428: Hu-Tucker Minimum
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Redundancy Alphabetic Coding Method  . . 360--362
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               R. L. Ashenhurst   A report of the ACM curriculum committee
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  on computer education for management.
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Curriculum recommendations for graduate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  professional programs in information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363--398
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 6, June, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. Blatny and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                S. R. Clark and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   T. A. Rourke   On the optimization of performance of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  time-sharing systems by simulation . . . 411--420
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   T. R. Spacek   A proposal to establish a pseudo virtual
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  memory via writable overlays . . . . . . 421--426
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 P. Gilbert and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 W. J. Chandler   Interference between Communicating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Parallel Processes . . . . . . . . . . . 427--437
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. F. Gimpel   Blocks-a new datatype for SNOBOL 4 . . . 438--447
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                David F. Martin   A Boolean matrix method for the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computation of linear precedence
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448--454
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Robert T. O'Reagan   Computer Assigned Codes from Verbal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Responses  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455--459
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      K. Iguchi   A starting method for solving nonlinear
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Volterra integral equations of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  second kind  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460--461
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        I. Pohl   A Sorting Problem and Its Complexity . . 462--464
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   K. S. Kolbig   Certification of algorithm 363 (complex
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  error function)  . . . . . . . . . . . . 465--466
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    H. Niessner   Remark on algorithm 343 (Eigenvalues and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  eigenvectors of a real general matrix)   466--466
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    L. G. Proll   Remark on ``ACM Algorithm 370 (General
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  random number generator) [G5]''  . . . . 467--468
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. F. Schrack   Remark on algorithm 381 (Random vectors
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  uniform in solid angle)  . . . . . . . . 468--468
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  A. H. J. Sale   Remark on algorithm 393 (Special series
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  summation with arbitrary precision)  . . 468--469
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   B. Einarsson   Remark on algorithm 418 (Calculation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Fourier integrals) . . . . . . . . . . . 469--469
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              S. C. Johnson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                B. W. Kernighan   Remark on algorithm 397 (An integer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  programming problem) . . . . . . . . . . 469--469
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Abraham Kandel   Computer Science --- A Vicious Circle    470--471
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  E. B. Koffman   Individualizing instruction in a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  generative CAI tutor . . . . . . . . . . 472--473
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              E. N. Houstis and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             W. F. Mitchell and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     J. R. Rice   ACM Algorithm 438: Product Type
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Two-point Gauss-Legendre-Simpson's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Integration  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 7, July, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Lee Revens   The first twenty-five years ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  1947--1962 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485--490
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Eric A. Weiss   Publications in computing: an informal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491--497
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   A. P. Ershov   Aesthetics and the Human Factor in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501--505
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Anonymous   As the industry sees it  . . . . . . . . 506--517
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Michael A. Arbib   Toward an Automata Theory of Brains  . . 521--527
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Zohar Manna and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Jean Vuillemin   Fixpoint Approach to the Theory of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528--536
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. F. Traub   Numerical Mathematics and Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Science  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537--541
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            David F. Shanno and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Roman L. Weil   Management science: a view from
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  nonlinear programming  . . . . . . . . . 542--549
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Joel Moses   Toward a General Theory of Special
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550--556 (or 550--554??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   C. C. Foster   A view of computer architecture  . . . . 557--565
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   A. G. Fraser   On the interface between computers and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  data communications systems  . . . . . . 566--573
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Per Brinch Hansen   Structured Multiprogramming  . . . . . . 574--578
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. C. Lynch   Operating system performance . . . . . . 579--585
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                S. R. Kimbleton   The role of computer system models in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  performance evaluation . . . . . . . . . 586--590
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Saul Rosen   Programming Systems and Languages
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  (1965--1975) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591--600
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Jean E. Sammet   Programming Languages: History and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601--610
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  L. D. Fosdick   The production of better mathematical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611--617
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. G. Bobrow   Requirements for Advanced Programming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems for List Processing  . . . . . . 618--627
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Charles W. Bachman   The Evolution of Storage Structures  . . 628--634
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     J. R. Rice   On the present and future of scientific
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637--639
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Robert I. Benjamin   A generational perspective of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  information system development . . . . . 640--643
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  S. Y. Sedelow   Language analysis in the humanities  . . 644--647
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     K. L. Zinn   Computers in the instructional process:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  directions for research and development  648--651
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. M. Sturman   Computers and urban society  . . . . . . 652--657
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      G. Salton   Dynamic document processing  . . . . . . 658--668
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Donald E. Knuth   Ancient Babylonian algorithms  . . . . . 671--677
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                F. L. Bauer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 H. Wossner and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Konrad Zuse   The ``Plankalkul'' of Konrad Zuse: a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  forerunner of today's programming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  languages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678--685
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Richard E. Sprague   A Western View of Computer History . . . 686--692
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Franz L. Alt   Archaeology of computers ---
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  reminiscences, 1945--1947  . . . . . . . 693--694
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 A. Borodin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  C. C. Gotlieb   Computers and employment . . . . . . . . 695--702
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 8, August, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                John G. Herriot   In memory of George E. Forsythe  . . . . 719--720
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Donald E. Knuth   George Forsythe and the development of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Science . . . . . . . . . . . . 721--726
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    David Crowe   Generating parsers for affix grammars.
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Collection of articles in honor of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  George E. Forsythe (ACM Student
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Competition Award Papers)  . . . . . . . 728--734
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Robert E. Helbig and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Patrick K. Orr and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Robert R. Roediger   Political Redistricting by Computer  . . 735--741
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Arthur J. Benjamin   Extensible Editor for a Small Machine
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  with Disk Storage  . . . . . . . . . . . 742--747
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Robert F. Rosin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Gideon Frieder and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       Richard H. Eckhouse, Jr.   Environment for Research in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Microprogramming and Emulation . . . . . 748--760
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 P. H. Oden and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. S. Shedler   A Model of Memory Contention in a Paging
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Machine  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761--771
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            H. J. Bernstein and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. T. Gladwin   Compiling fixed-point multiplications    772--772
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             W. L. van der Poel   Comment on the composition of semantics
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in Algol 68  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772--772
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           James H. Morris, Jr.   A Bonus from van Wijngaarden's Device    773--773
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    P. R. Jones   Comment on average binary search length  774--774
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Ronald C. Read and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      K. Harada   A note on the generation of rosary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  permutations. With a response by K.
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Harada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775--775
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      W. Squire   ACM Algorithm 429: Localization of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Roots of a Polynomial  . . . . . . . . . 776--777
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           P. W. Purdom Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    E. F. Moore   ACM Algorithm 430: Immediate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Predominators in a Directed Graph  . . . 777--778
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 9, September, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               K. N. Levitt and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. H. Kautz   Cellular Arrays for the Solution of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Graph Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789--801
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Sakti P. Ghosh   File Organization --- The Consecutive
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Retrieval Property . . . . . . . . . . . 802--808
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     M. Mor and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      T. Lamdan   A New Approach to Automatic Scanning of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Contour Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809--812
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Paul L. Richman   Automatic Error Analysis for Determining
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Precision  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813--817
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   A. Ravindran   ACM Algorithm 431: A Computer Routine
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Quadratic and Linear Programming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818--820
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              R. H. Bartels and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. W. Stewart   ACM Algorithm 432: Solution of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Matrix Equation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  ${\bf{A}}x+x{\bf{B}}={\bf{C}}$ . . . . . 820--826
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  E. S. Deutsch   Thinning Algorithms on Rectangular,
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Hexagonal, and Triangular Arrays . . . . 827--837
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     J. Gregory   A Comparison of Floating Point Summation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Methods  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838--838
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Hatem M. Khalil   The eigenproblem of block tridiagonal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839--839
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. L. Parnas and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            A. N. Habermann and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. C. Holt   Comment on Deadlock Prevention Method    840--841
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              R. Rubinstein and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     J. Feldman   A controller for a Braille terminal  . . 841--842
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      K. C. Tan   On Foster's Information Storage and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Retrieval Using AVL Trees  . . . . . . . 843--843
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 10, October, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 E. W. Dijkstra   The Humble Programmer  . . . . . . . . . 859--866
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                James B. Morris   Demand Paging Through Utilization of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Working Sets on the Maniac II  . . . . . 867--872
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. H. Ahrens and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      U. Dieter   Computer Methods for Sampling from the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Exponential and Normal Distributions . . 873--882
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Richard J. Hanson   Integral Equations of Immunology . . . . 883--890
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Robert F. Simmons and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Jonathan Slocum   Generating English Discourse from
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Semantic Networks  . . . . . . . . . . . 891--905
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Gert Dathe   Conversion of Decision Tables by Rule
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Mask Method without Rule Mask  . . . . . 906--909
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               W. D. Frazer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     C. K. Wong   Sorting by Natural Selection . . . . . . 910--913
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   A. P. Ershov   Corrigendum: ``Aesthetics and the Human
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Factor in Programming''  . . . . . . . . 913--913
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       H. Akima   ACM Algorithm 433: Interpolation and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Smooth Curve Fitting Based on Local
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914--918
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 11, November, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Phyllis Fox   Comparative Study of Computer Programs
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Integrating Differential Equations   941--948
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Michael A. Malcolm   Algorithms to Reveal Properties of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Floating-Point Arithmetic  . . . . . . . 949--951
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Merrell L. Patrick   A Highly Parallel Algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Approximating All Zeros of a Polynomial
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  with Only Real Zeros . . . . . . . . . . 952--955
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Henry F. Ledgard   Model for Type Checking --- with an
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Application to Algol 60  . . . . . . . . 956--966
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Peter Henderson   Derived Semantics for Some Programming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Language Constructs  . . . . . . . . . . 967--973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    M. Verhelst   Conversion of Limited-Entry Decision
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Tables to Optimal and Near-Optimal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Flowcharts: Two New Algorithms . . . . . 974--980
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. D. Baecker   Garbage Collection for Virtual Memory
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 981--986
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            John S. Ramberg and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Bruce W. Schmeiser   Approximate Method for Generating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Symmetric Random Variables . . . . . . . 987--990
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    D. L. March   ACM Algorithm 434: Exact Probabilities
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for ${R\times{C}}$ Contingency Tables    991--992
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. Fullerton   ACM Algorithm 435: Modified Incomplete
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Gamma Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993--995
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  V. Y. Lum and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  P. S. T. Yuen   Additional results on key-to-address
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  transform techniques: a fundamental
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  performance study on large existing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  formatted files  . . . . . . . . . . . . 996--997
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     S. Kennedy   A note on optimal doubly-chained trees   997--998
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Murray A. Eisenberg and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Michael R. McGuire   Further comments on Dijkstra's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  concurrent programming control problem   999--999
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  S. W. Smoliar   Comments on Moorer's Music and computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  composition  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000--1001
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 12, December, 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        J. Richard Phillips and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    H. C. Adams   Dynamic Partitioning for Array Languages 1023--1032
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. Bayer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    C. Witzgall   Index Ranges for Matrix Calculi  . . . . 1033--1039
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Jay Earley and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Paul Caizergues   Method for Incrementally Compiling
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Languages with Nested Statement
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Structure  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040--1044
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Fabrizio Luccio   Weighted Increment Linear Search for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Scatter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045--1047
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 D. R. Barr and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   N. L. Slezak   A comparison of multivariate normal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048--1049
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 John Moore and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Prentiss Robinson   New Method for the Solution of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Cauchy Problem for Parabolic Equations   1050--1052
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. L. Parnas   On the Criteria to Be Used in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Decomposing Systems into Modules . . . . 1053--1058
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    P. J. Brown   Levels of Language for Portable Software 1059--1062
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Stephen Sherman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Forest Baskett, III and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. C. Browne   Trace-Driven Modeling and Analysis of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  CPU Scheduling in a Multiprogramming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063--1069
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. R. Boland   ACM Algorithm 436: Product Type
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Trapezoidal Integration  . . . . . . . . 1070--1070
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. R. Boland   ACM Algorithm 437: Product Type
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Simpson's Integration  . . . . . . . . . 1070--1071
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. R. Boland   ACM Algorithm 439: Product Type
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Three-point Gauss-Legendre-Simpson's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Integration  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 15,  Number 2, February, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Peter J. Denning and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Stuart C. Schwartz   Corrigendum: ``Properties of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  working-set model''  . . . . . . . . . . 191--198
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 1, January, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. S. Shedler   A Queuing Model of a Multiprogrammed
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer with a Two-Level Storage System 3--10
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Carter Bays   The Reallocation of Hash-Coded Tables    11--14
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           James H. Morris, Jr.   Protection in Programming Languages  . . 15--21
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Yoichi Muraoka and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  David J. Kuck   On the Time Required for a Sequence of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Matrix Products  . . . . . . . . . . . . 22--26
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                E. B. James and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                D. P. Partridge   Adaptive Correction of Program
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27--37
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  P. L. Richman   Variable-Precision Exponentiation  . . . 38--40
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. R. Crawford   Reduction of a Band-Symmetric
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Generalized Eigenvalue Problem . . . . . 41--44
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               S. E. Blount and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        L. Fein   The practical aspect of computer science
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  education --- discussion . . . . . . . . 45--46
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        C. Bays   A note on when to chain overflow items
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  within a direct-access table . . . . . . 46--47
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   M. S. Atkins   Mutual recursion in Algol 60 using
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  restricted compilers . . . . . . . . . . 47--48
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 L. J. Gallaher   ACM Algorithm 440: A Multidimensional
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Monte Carlo Quadrature with Adaptive
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Stratified Sampling  . . . . . . . . . . 49--50
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. E. Knop   ACM Algorithm 441: Random samples from
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the dipole distribution [G5] . . . . . . 51--51
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 G. W. Hill and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    A. W. Davis   ACM Algorithm 442: Normal deviate [S14]  51--52
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 2, February, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. D. Merrill   Representation of Contours and Regions
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Efficient Computer Search  . . . . . 69--82
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         S. Crespi-Reghizzi and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            M. A. Melkanoff and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     L. Lichten   The Use of Grammatical Inference for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Designing Programming Languages  . . . . 83--90
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. F. Gimpel   A Theory of Discrete Patterns and Their
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Implementation in SNOBOL4  . . . . . . . 91--100
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       J. Rokne   Automatic Errorbounds for Simple Zeros
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Analytic Functions  . . . . . . . . . 101--104
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Richard P. Brent   Reducing the Retrieval Time of Scatter
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Storage Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . 105--109
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Robert M. Graham and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								      Gerald J. Clancy, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               David B. DeVaney   A software design and evaluation system  110--116
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. M. Balzer   An overview of the ISPL computer system
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117--122
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              F. N. Fritsch and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               R. E. Shafer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  W. P. Crowley   ACM Algorithm 443: Solution of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Transcendental Equation $w e^w = x$  . . 123--124
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 3, March, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Richard H. Austing and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Gerald L. Engel   A Computer Science Course Program for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Small Colleges . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139--147
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Robert A. Wagner   Common Phrases and Minimum-Space Text
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Storage  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148--152
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Y. Feinroth and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            E. Franceschini and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   M. Goldstein   Telecommunications Using a Front-End
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Minicomputer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153--160
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Charles D. Pack   The Effects of Multiplexing on a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer-Communications System . . . . . 161--168
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Richard W. Conway and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Thomas R. Wilcox   Design and Implementation of Diagnostic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Compiler for PL/I  . . . . . . . . . . . 169--179
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. E. Salzer   Gray code and the +or-sign sequence when
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  +or-f(+or-f(+or-f( . . +or-f(x) . . .)))
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  is ordered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180--180
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Abraham Bookstein   On Harrison's Substring Testing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Technique  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180--181
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. H. Payne   Graduate Education: The Ph.D. Glut . . . 181--182
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. A. Wagner   ACM Algorithm 444: An Algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Extracting Phrases in a Space-Optimal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Fashion  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183--185
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Shi-Kuo Chang   ACM Algorithm 445: Binary Pattern
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Reconstruction from Projections  . . . . 185--186
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                         J. Lau   Binary pattern reconstruction from
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  projections  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186--186
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 4, April, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 A. Hassitt and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          J. W. Lageschulte and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     L. E. Lyon   Implementation of a High Level Language
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Machine  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199--212
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               John G. Williams   Asymmetric Memory Hierarchies  . . . . . 213--222
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    H. Kuki and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     W. J. Cody   A Statistical Study of the Accuracy of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Floating Point Number Systems  . . . . . 223--230
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             W. A. Burkhard and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. M. Keller   Some Approaches to Best-Match File
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Searching  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230--236
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       James P. Strong, III and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Azriel Rosenfeld   A region coloring technique for scene
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237--246
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								      Juan Rodriguez-Rosell and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jean-Pierre Dupuy   The design, implementation, and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  evaluation of a working set dispatcher   247--253
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. Broucke   ACM Algorithm 446: Ten Subroutines for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the Manipulation of Chebyshev Series . . 254--256
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              L. C. Ragland and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     D. I. Good   Greatest common divisor of $n$ integers
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and multipliers  . . . . . . . . . . . . 257--257
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 5, May, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    David Pager   On the Problem of Communicating Complex
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Information  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275--281
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   David W. Low   Programming by Questionnaire: an
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Effective Way to Use Decision Tables . . 282--286
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              P. J. H. King and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. G. Johnson   Some Comments on the Use of Ambiguous
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Decision Tables and Their Conversion to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Programs  . . . . . . . . . . . 287--290
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   John Salasin   Hierarchical Storage in Information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Retrieval  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291--295
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              D. G. Corneil and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              C. C. Gotlieb and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Y. M. Lee   Minimal Event-Node Network of Project
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Precedence Relations . . . . . . . . . . 296--298
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Andrew Mercer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Azriel Rosenfeld   An array grammar programming system  . . 299--305
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Edward M. Reingold   A Nonrecursive List Moving Algorithm . . 305--307
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                         H. Vos   Coulomb wave functions . . . . . . . . . 308--309
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       G. Bayer   Maxflow  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309--309
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                B. Holmgren and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    A. Kolm and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. Obradovic   Minit algorithm for linear programming   310--310
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. Obradovic   Minit algorithm for linear programming   310--310
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. A. Howell   Exact solution of linear equations using
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  residue arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . 311--311
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  A. H. J. Sale   A sparse matrix package  . . . . . . . . 311--311
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. E. Wheeler   Increasing the efficiency of quicksort   311--311
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      M. K. Roy   Reflection-free permutations, rosary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  permutations and adjacent transposition
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312--312
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. H. McMorrow   Concerning music and computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  composition in computational linguistics 313--313
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. L. Wexelblat   Another comment on computer music  . . . 313--314
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. G. Estell   A comment on the practical aspects of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computer science education . . . . . . . 314--315
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Roger Fajman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   John Borgelt   WYLBUR, An Interactive Text Editing and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Remote Job Entry System  . . . . . . . . 314--322
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Dennis J. Frailey   A Practical Approach to Managing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Resources and Avoiding Deadlocks . . . . 323--329
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 6, June, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. G. Hamlet   Efficient multiprogramming resource
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  allocation and accounting  . . . . . . . 337--342
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 E. Gelenbe and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         J. C. A. Boekhorst and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. L. W. Kessels   Minimizing wasted space in partitioned
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  segmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343--349
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     J. C. Hill   Synchronizing processors with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  memory-content-generated interrupts  . . 350--351
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Harold S. Stone and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Samuel F. Fuller   On the Near-Optimality of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Shortest-Latency-Time-First Drum
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Scheduling Discipline  . . . . . . . . . 352--353
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              P. F. Stockhausen   Adapting optimal code generation for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  arithmetic expressions to the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  instruction sets available on
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  present-day computers  . . . . . . . . . 353--354
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. F. Ling   A computer generated aid for cluster
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355--361
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Ben Shneiderman   Optimum Data Base Reorganization Points  362--365
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      H. Strunz   The development of decision tables via
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  parsing of complex decision situations   366--369
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  James R. Bell   Threaded Code  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370--372
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. Hopcroft and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      R. Tarjan   ACM Algorithm 447: Efficient Algorithms
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Graph Manipulation . . . . . . . . . 372--378
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   T. Beyer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                D. F. Swinehart   ACM Algorithm 448: Number of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Multiply-Restricted Partitions . . . . . 379--379
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. Ferguson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   P. A. Staley   Least squares piecewise cubic curve
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  fitting  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380--382
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  W. D. Hoskins   Cubic spline solutions to fourth-order
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  boundary value problems  . . . . . . . . 382--385
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Franz L. Alt and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Judith Yuni Kirk   Computer Photocomposition of Technical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386--391
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 7, July, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Richard L. Nolan   Managing the Computer Resource: Stage
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Hypothesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399--405
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. C. Huang   A Note on Information Organization and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Storage  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406--410
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								      Edward W. Kozdrowicki and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Dennis W. Cooper   COKO III: the Cooper-Koz Chess Program   411--427 (or 411--426??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            John H. Howard, Jr.   Mixed Solutions for the Deadlock Problem 427--430
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Erol Gelenbe   Distribution of a Program in Primary and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Fast Buffer Storage  . . . . . . . . . . 431--434
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Robert F. Rosin   Teaching ``About Programming'' . . . . . 435--439
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         F. Warren McFarlan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Richard L. Nolan   Curriculum Recommendations for Graduate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Professional Programs in Information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems: Recommended Addendum on
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Information Systems Administration . . . 439--442 (or 439--441??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      A. Kandel   Computer Science --- Seminars for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Undergraduates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442--442
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 G. V. Bochmann   Multiple Exits from a Loop Without the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443--444
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Patrick A. V. Hall   Equivalence Between AND/OR Graphs and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Context-Free Grammars  . . . . . . . . . 444--445
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       F. Fiala   ACM Algorithm 449: Solution of Linear
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming Problems in 0-1 Variables    445--448 (or 445--447??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                B. W. Kernighan   Remark on ``Algorithm 422: Minimal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Spanning Tree''  . . . . . . . . . . . . 448--448
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           I. D. G. Macleod and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  A. M. Collins   Hidden-line plotting program . . . . . . 448--448
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  P. J. Nikolai   DIFSUB for solution of ordinary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  differential equations . . . . . . . . . 448--448
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 8, August, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Michael H. Smith   A learning program which plays
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  partnership dominoes . . . . . . . . . . 462--467
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                B. J. MacLennan   Fen --- an Axiomatic Basis for Program
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Semantics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468--474
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  David Misunas   Petri Nets and Speed Independent Design  474--482 (or 474--481??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 M. MacHura and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      A. Mulawa   ACM Algorithm 450: Rosenbrock Function
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Minimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482--483
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. B. Goldstein   ACM Algorithm 451: Chi-Square Quantiles  483--485
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  C. N. Liu and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     D. T. Tang   ACM Algorithm 452: Enumerating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Combinations of $m$ Out of $n$ Objects   485--485
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Robert Piessens   ACM Algorithm 453: Gaussian Quadrature
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Formulas for Bromwich's Integral . . . . 486--487
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           J. A. Richardson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. L. Kuester   ACM Algorithm 454: The Complex Method
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Constrained Optimization . . . . . . 487--489
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              G. Andrejkova and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       J. Vinar   Complex gamma function . . . . . . . . . 489--489
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. M. De Morgan   Remark on ``Algorithm 357 [A1]: An
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Efficient Prime Number Generator'' . . . 489--489
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. P. Watkins   Graph plotter  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489--490
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. G. Byrne   Hu-Tucker minimum redundancy alphabetic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  coding method  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490--490
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     A. J. Good   Clenshaw-Curtis quadrature . . . . . . . 490--490
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 E. J. Williams   Localization of the roots of a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  polynomial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490--490
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Zohar Manna and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Stephen Ness and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Jean Vuillemin   Inductive Methods for Proving Properties
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Programs  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491--502
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             W. W. Peterson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  T. Kasami and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      N. Tokura   On the Capabilities of While, Repeat,
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and Exit Statements  . . . . . . . . . . 503--512
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Caxton C. Foster   A Generalization of AVL Trees  . . . . . 513--517
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 9, September, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Jeffrey P. Buzen   Computational Algorithms for Closed
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Queueing Networks with Exponential
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Servers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527--531
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               S. Ganapathy and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   V. Rajaraman   Information Theory Applied to the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Conversion of Decision Tables to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Programs  . . . . . . . . . . . 532--539
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Alfonso F. Cardenas   Evaluation and Selection of File
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Organization --- A Model and a System    540--548
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. G. Casey   Design of Tree Structures for Efficient
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549--556
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Juan Rodriguez-Rosell   Empirical Working Set Behavior . . . . . 556--560
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Geoffrey W. Gates and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             David A. Poplawski   A simple technique for structured
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  variable lookup  . . . . . . . . . . . . 561--565
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                M. V. Zelkowitz   Reversible Execution . . . . . . . . . . 566--566
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Robert E. Barnhill and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               David T. Pilcher   Sard kernels for certain bivariate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  cubatures  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567--571 (or 567--570??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. B. Hunter and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. M. Williams   ACM Algorithm 455: Analysis of Skew
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Representations of the Symmetric Group   571--572
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Zden\vek Fencl   ACM Algorithm 456: Routing Problem . . . 572--574
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Coen Bron and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Joep Kerbosch   ACM Algorithm 457: Finding All Cliques
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of an Undirected Graph . . . . . . . . . 575--577
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      M. K. Roy   Remark on ``Algorithm 323 [G6]:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Generation of Permutations in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Lexicographic Order''  . . . . . . . . . 577--578
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Mohit Kumar Roy   Remark on ``Algorithm 323 [G6]:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Generation of Permutations in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Lexicographic Order''  . . . . . . . . . 577--578
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 E. E. Lawrence   A sparse matrix package. I . . . . . . . 578--578
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. Williamson   Hidden-line plotting program . . . . . . 578--579
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             H. B. Driessen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                E. W. LeM. Hunt   Localization of the roots of a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  polynomial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579--579
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 10, October, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              John S. McGeachie   Multiple Terminals Under User Program
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Control in a Time-Sharing Environment    587--590
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Daniel G. Bobrow and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ben Wegbreit   A Model and Stack Implementation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Multiple Environments  . . . . . . . . . 591--603
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Vincent Y. Lum   General Performance Analysis of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Key-to-Address Transformation Methods
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Using an Abstract File Concept . . . . . 603--612
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Butler W. Lampson   A Note on the Confinement Problem  . . . 613--615
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Daniel S. Hirschberg   A Class of Dynamic Memory Allocation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615--618
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Barton G. Prieve   Using Page Residency to Select the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Working Set Parameter  . . . . . . . . . 619--620
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Robert E. Millstein   Control Structures in Illiac IV Fortran  621--627
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               P. D. Robers and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   S. S. Robers   ACM Algorithm 458: Discrete Linear
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  ${L}_1$ Approximation by Interval Linear
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629--631
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    M. M. Syslo   ACM Algorithm 459: The Elementary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Circuits of a Graph  . . . . . . . . . . 632--633
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Paul E. Saylor and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             James D. Sebastian   ACM Algorithm 460: Calculation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Optimum Parameters for Alternating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Direction Implicit Procedures  . . . . . 633--635
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            F. J. Burkowski and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  W. D. Hoskins   ACM Algorithm 461: Cubic Spline
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Solutions to a Class of Functional
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Differential Equations . . . . . . . . . 635--637
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 T. G. Donnelly   ACM Algorithm 462: Bivariate Normal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638--638
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   C. R. Lewart   ACM Algorithm 463: Algorithms SCALE1,
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  SCALE2, and SCALE3 for Determination of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Scales on Computer Generated Plots . . . 639--640
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 11, November, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Charles W. Bachman   The Programmer as Navigator  . . . . . . 653--658
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. S. Fabry   Dynamic Verification of Operating System
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Decisions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659--668
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             M. D. Mickunas and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                V. B. Schneider   Parser-Generating System for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Constructing Compressed Compilers  . . . 669--676
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          B. W. Jordan, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. C. Barrett   Scan Conversion Algorithm with Reduced
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Storage Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 676--682
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            James R. Slagle and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Lewis M. Norton   Experiments with an Automatic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Theorem-Prover Having Partial Ordering
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Inference Rules  . . . . . . . . . . . . 682--688
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  C. H. Reinsch   ACM Algorithm 464: Eigenvalues of a Real
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Symmetric Tridiagonal Matrix . . . . . . 689--689
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     G. W. Hill   ACM Algorithm 465: Student's $t$
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Frequency  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690--690
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     G. Ehrlich   ACM Algorithm 466: Four Combinatorial
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690--691
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     N. Brenner   ACM Algorithm 467: Matrix Transposition
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692--694
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             T. N. L. Patterson   ACM Algorithm 468: Algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Automatic Numerical Integration Over a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Finite Interval  . . . . . . . . . . . . 694--699
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     C. Lam and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       J. McKay   ACM Algorithm 469: Arithmetic Over a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Finite Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699--699
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Peter J. Denning and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                G. Scott Graham   A Note on Subexpression Ordering in the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Execution of Arithmetic Expressions  . . 700--702
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Jerome A. Feldman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               James R. Low and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. P. Brent   Comment on Brent's scatter storage
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  algorithm (and author's reply) . . . . . 703--703
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      E. Wegner   Tree-structured programs . . . . . . . . 704--705
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Herbert E. Salzer   A recurrence scheme for converting from
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  one orthogonal expansion into another    705--707
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     F. Stenger   An algorithm for the approximate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  solution of Wiener-Hopf integral
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  equations  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708--710
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  L. W. Ehrlich   Solving the Biharmonic Equation in a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Square: a Direct Versus a Semidirect
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711--714
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 16,  Number 12, December, 1973
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. Daniel Couger   Curriculum Recommendations for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Undergraduate Programs in Information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727--749
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Edgar H. Sibley and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Robert W. Taylor   A Data Definition and Mapping Language   750--759
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     M. Kubicek   ACM Algorithm 470: Linear Systems with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Almost Tridiagonal Matrix  . . . . . . . 760--761
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. Gautschi   ACM Algorithm 471: Exponential Integrals 761--763
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              J. G. Herriot and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  C. H. Reinsch   ACM Algorithm 472: Procedures for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Natural Spline Interpolation . . . . . . 763--768
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 1, January, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        G. Lyon   Syntax-directed least-errors analysis
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for context-free languages: a practical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--14
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Michael A. Malcolm and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    John Palmer   A Fast Method For Solving a Class of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Tridiagonal Systems of Linear Equations  14--17
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       H. Akima   A method of bivariate interpolation and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  smooth surface fitting based on local
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18--20
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Norman E. Gibbs and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          William G. Poole, Jr.   Tridiagonalization by Permutations . . . 20--24
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. Piessens   ACM Algorithm 473: Computation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Legendre Series Coefficients . . . . . . 25--25
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       H. Akima   ACM Algorithm 474: Bivariate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Interpolation and Smooth Surface Fitting
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Based on Local Procedures  . . . . . . . 26--31
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Ivan E. Sutherland and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Gary W. Hodgman   Reentrant Polygon Clipping . . . . . . . 32--42
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              P. J. H. King and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. G. Johnson   Comments on the algorithms of Verhelst
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for the conversion of limited-entry
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  decision tables to flowcharts (and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  author's reply)  . . . . . . . . . . . . 43--45
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Gary D. Knott   A Numbering System for Combinations  . . 45--46
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               H. C. Lucas, Jr.   A CRT report generating system . . . . . 47--48
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 2, February, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								      James B. Rothnie, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Tomas Lozano   Attribute Based File Organization in a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Paged Memory Environment . . . . . . . . 63--69
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          B. W. Jordan, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. C. Barrett   A cell organized raster display for line
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70--77
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            John S. Ramberg and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Bruce W. Schmeiser   An Approximate Method for Generating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Asymmetric Random Variables  . . . . . . 78--82
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Leslie Lamport   The Parallel Execution of DO Loops . . . 83--93
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Henry F. Ledgard   Production Systems: or can we do better
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  than BNF?  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94--102
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ben Wegbreit   The Synthesis of Loop Predicates . . . . 102--112
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 3, March, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             K. Sreenivasan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 A. J. Kleinman   On the Construction of a Representative
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Synthetic Workload . . . . . . . . . . . 127--133
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               E. Balkovich and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. Chiu and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 L. Presser and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        R. Wood   Dynamic Memory Repacking . . . . . . . . 133--138
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Howard Lee Morgan   Optimal Space Allocation on Disk Storage
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Devices  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139--142
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Rudolf Loeser   Some Performance Tests of ``Quicksort''
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and Descendants  . . . . . . . . . . . . 143--152
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      T. Wright   Visible surface plotting program . . . . 152--157 (or 152--155??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               N. E. Bosten and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 E. L. Battiste   Incomplete beta ratio  . . . . . . . . . 156--157
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              R. C. Barrett and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              B. W. Jordan, Jr.   Scan Conversion Algorithms for a Cell
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Organized Raster Display . . . . . . . . 157--163
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              A. Frank Ackerman   Quadratic Search for Hash Tables of Size
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  $p^n$  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164--164
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Harold S. Stone   A note on a combinatorial problem of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Burnett and Coffman  . . . . . . . . . . 165--166
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Fred T. Krogh   Efficient Implementation of a Variable
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Projection Algorithm for Nonlinear Least
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Squares Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 167--169
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 4, April, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jerome H. Saltzer   A Simple Linear Model of Demand Paging
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Performance  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181--186
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             M. A. Franklin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. K. Gupta   Computation of Page Fault Probability
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  from Program Transition Diagram  . . . . 186--191
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  John W. Boyse   Execution Characteristics of Programs in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  a Page-On-Demand System  . . . . . . . . 192--196
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Graham Smith and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Ian M. Sefton   On Lions' Counter Example for Gotlieb's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Method for the Construction of School
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Timetables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196--197
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Gary Lindstrom   Copying List Structures Using Bounded
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Workspace  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198--202
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Shimon Even   Parallelism in Tape-Sorting  . . . . . . 202--204
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           H. C. Lucas, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           D. B. Montgomery and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. C. Larreche   A study of computer use in a graduate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  school of business . . . . . . . . . . . 205--206
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Peter Freeman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Michael A. Malcolm and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               William H. Payne   Graduate Education: The Ph.D. Glut:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Response and Rebuttal  . . . . . . . . . 206--207
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             T. D. Sterling and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  S. V. Pollack   Ideal teaching machines --- a solution
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  to the pedagogic language problem  . . . 207--208
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 P. W. Abrahams   Some remarks on lookup of structured
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  variables  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209--210
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     A. Balfour   An alternative approach to mutual
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  recursion in Algol 60 using restricted
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  compilers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210--210
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               R. C. T. Lee and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                C. L. Chang and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. J. Waldinger   An Improved Program-Synthesizing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithm and its Correctness  . . . . . 211--217
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    A. K. Cline   Scalar- and planar-valued curve fitting
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  using splines under tension. I . . . . . 218--220
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    A. K. Cline   ACM Algorithm 476: Six Subprograms for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Curve Fitting Using Splines Under
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Tension  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220--223 (or 220--221??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     G. Ehrlich   ACM Algorithm 477: Generator of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Set-Partitions to Exactly ${R}$ Subsets  224--225
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   B. Einarsson   Solution of the transcendental equation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  we/sup w/=x  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225--225
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 5, May, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Mary Shaw   Reduction of Compilation Costs Through
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Language Contraction . . . . . . . . . . 245--250
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ben Wegbreit   The treatment of data types in EL1 . . . 251--264
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Robert A. Wagner   Order-$n$ Correction for Regular
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Languages  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265--268
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Nai Kuan Tsao   On the Distributions of Significant
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Digits and Roundoff Errors . . . . . . . 269--271
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           M. C. Wunderlich and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. L. Selfridge   Design for a Number Theory Package with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  an Optimized Trial Division Routine  . . 272--276
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            W. M. Gentleman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 S. B. Marovich   More on Algorithms that Reveal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Properties of Floating Point Arithmetic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Units  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276--277
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 D. E. Gold and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     D. J. Kuck   A Model for Masking Rotational Latency
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  by Dynamic Disk Allocation . . . . . . . 278--288
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 6, June, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jacques Cohen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Carl Zuckerman   Two Languages for Estimating Program
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301--308
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                L. Henschen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Ross A. Overbeek and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                         L. Wos   A Theorem-Proving Language for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Experimentation  . . . . . . . . . . . . 308--314
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                James F. Gimpel   The minimization of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  spatially-multiplexed character sets . . 315--318
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               I. Barrodale and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               F. D. K. Roberts   ACM Algorithm 478: Solution of an
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Overdetermined System of Equations in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the ${L_1}$ Norm . . . . . . . . . . . . 319--320
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. L. Page   ACM Algorithm 479: A Minimal Spanning
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Tree Clustering Method . . . . . . . . . 321--323
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     B. Gaither   Hidden-line plotting program . . . . . . 324--324
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. Piessens   Calculation of Fourier integrals . . . . 324--324
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. Piessens   Modified Havie integration . . . . . . . 324--324
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 T. M. R. Ellis   Hidden-line plotting program . . . . . . 324--325
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. L. Page   Generation of random correlated normal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  variables  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325--325
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  D. M. Boulton   Exact probabilities for R*C contingency
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326--326
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. D. Slysz   An evaluation of software in the social
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  sciences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326--332
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 John Adams and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      John Gary   Compact Representation of Contour Plots
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Phone Line Transmission  . . . . . . 333--336
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. Wulf and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   E. Cohen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  W. Corwin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   A. Jones and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. Levin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. Pierson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     F. Pollack   HYDRA: The Kernel of a Multiprocessor
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . 337--345
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Ian J. Barton and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Susan E. Creasey and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Michael F. Lynch and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Michael J. Snell   An Information-Theoretic Approach to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Text Searching in Direct Access Systems  345--350
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Edward Minieka   On Computing Sets of Shortest Paths in a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Graph  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351--353
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 7, July, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Dennis M. Ritchie and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ken Thompson   The UNIX Time-Sharing System . . . . . . 365--375
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Samuel H. Fuller   Minimal-Total-Processing Time Drum and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Disk Scheduling Disciplines  . . . . . . 376--381
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. Bruno and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         E. G. Coffman, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       R. Sethi   Scheduling Independent Tasks To Reduce
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Mean Finishing Time  . . . . . . . . . . 382--387
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jerome H. Saltzer   Protection and the Control of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Information Sharing in Multics . . . . . 388--402
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. S. Fabry   Capability-Based Addressing  . . . . . . 403--412
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Gerald J. Popek and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Robert P. Goldberg   Formal Requirements for Virtualizable
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Third Generation Architectures . . . . . 412--421
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 8, August, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Bruce Hahn   A New Technique for Compression and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Storage of Data  . . . . . . . . . . . . 434--436
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Arthur Evans, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         William Kantrowitz and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Edwin Weiss   A User Authentication Scheme Not
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Requiring Secrecy in the Computer  . . . 437--442
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                George B. Purdy   A High Security Log-in Procedure . . . . 442--445
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       Theodore D. Friedman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Lance J. Hoffman   Execution Time Requirements for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Encipherment Programs  . . . . . . . . . 445--449
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              G. A. Neufeld and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      J. Tartar   Graph Coloring Conditions for the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Existence of Solutions to the Timetable
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Problem  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450--453
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Leslie Lamport   A New Solution of Dijkstra's Concurrent
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming Problem  . . . . . . . . . . 453--455
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               John C. Cavouras   On the Conversion of Programs to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Decision Tables: Method and Objectives   456--462
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   T. Lyche and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                L. L. Schumaker   ACM Algorithm 480: Procedures for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computing Smoothing and Interpolating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Natural Splines  . . . . . . . . . . . . 463--467
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 K. C. Crandall   ACM Algorithm 481: Arrow to Precedence
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Network Transformation . . . . . . . . . 467--469
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 John McKay and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     E. Regener   ACM Algorithm 482: Transitivity Sets
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  [G7] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470--470
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   A. H. Stroud   Gauss Harmonic Interpolation Formulas    471--475
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Rolf O. E. Lagerloef   Interpolation with Rounded Ramp
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476--479
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Forman S. Acton   Recurrence Relations for the Fresnel
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Integral
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  $\int_0^\infty[\exp(-ct)dt/(t)^{1/2}(1+t^2)]$ and Similar Integrals  480--481
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 9, September, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  I. M. Willers   A New Integration Algorithm for Ordinary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Differential Equations Based on
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Continued Fraction Approximations  . . . 504--508
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Oliver Aberth   A Precise Numerical Analysis Program . . 509--513
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 To-yat. Cheung   Interactive Graphic Display for Region
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Partitioning by Linear Programming . . . 513--516
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Mario Schkolnick   The Equivalence of Reducing Transition
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Languages and Deterministic Languages    517--519
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  S. L. Watkins   ACM Algorithm 483: Masked
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Three-Dimensional Plot Program with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Rotations  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520--523
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  K. H. Burrell   ACM Algorithm 484: Evaluation of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Modified Bessel Functions ${K}_0(z)$ and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  ${K}_1(z)$ for Complex Arguments . . . . 524--526
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               H. D. Eidson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                L. L. Schumaker   ACM Algorithm 485: Computation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  $g$-Splines via a Factorization Method   526--530
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  John W. Young   A First Order Approximation to the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Optimum Checkpoint Interval  . . . . . . 530--531
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Keith Shwayder   Extending the Information Theory
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Approach to Converting Limited-Entry
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Decision Tables to Computer Programs . . 532--537
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 10, October, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. A. R. Hoare   Monitors: An Operating System
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Structuring Concept  . . . . . . . . . . 549--557
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Kenneth K. Shen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              James L. Peterson   A Weighted Buddy Method for Dynamic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Storage Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . 558--568 (or 558--562??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                D. R. Slutz and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  I. L. Traiger   A note on the calculation of average
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  working set size . . . . . . . . . . . . 563--565
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Ben Shneiderman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Peter Scheuermann   Structured Data Structures . . . . . . . 566--574
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              R. H. Canaday and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             R. D. Harrison and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 E. L. Ivie and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. L. Ryder and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     L. A. Wehr   A Back-end Computer for Data Base
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575--583 (or 575--582??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 A. Charnes and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                W. M. Raike and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. D. Stutz and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  A. S. Walters   On Generation of Test Problems for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Linear Programming Codes . . . . . . . . 583--587 (or 583--586??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     F. Veillon   ACM Algorithm 486: Numerical Inversion
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Laplace Transform . . . . . . . . . . 587--589 (or 587--588??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. Koppelaar   Certification and remark on algorithm
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  191  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589--590
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    L. G. Proll   A computer routine for quadratic and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  linear programming problems  . . . . . . 590--590
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. Klemes and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      J. Klemsa   Rosenbrock function minimization . . . . 590--591
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Fred T. Krogh   Errata: ``Efficient Implementation of a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Variable Projection Algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Nonlinear Least Squares''  . . . . . . . 591--591
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Bruce Gilchrist and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Richard E. Weber   Enumerating Full-Time Programmers  . . . 592--593
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 11, November, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Theodor D. Sterling   Guidelines for Humanizing Computerized
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Information Systems, A Report from
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Stanley House  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609--613
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Domenico Ferrari   Improving Locality by Critical Working
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614--620
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Perry Lowell Miller   A locally-organized parser for spoken
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  input  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621--630
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Gary M. Rader   Method for Composing Simple Traditional
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Music by Computer  . . . . . . . . . . . 631--638
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            R. A. Freiburghouse   Register Allocation via Usage Counts . . 638--642
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 E. W. Dijkstra   Self-stabilizing Systems in Spite of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Distributed Control  . . . . . . . . . . 643--644
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. A. Brown and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      B. Werner   An on-site data management system
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  application in field archaeology . . . . 644--646
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. R. Hanson   A simple technique for representing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  strings in Fortran IV  . . . . . . . . . 646--647
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           C. J. Van Rijsbergen   The best-match problem in document
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  retrieval  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648--649
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. V. Evans   Multiple exits from a loop using neither
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  GO TO nor labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 650--650
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 17,  Number 12, December, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Donald E. Knuth   Computer Programming as an Art . . . . . 667--673
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Laurance I. Press   Arguments for a Moratorium on the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Construction of a Community Information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Utility  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674--678
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. C. Strauss   An analytic model of the Hasp execution
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  task monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679--685
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Thomas L. Adam and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               K. M. Chandy and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. R. Dickson   A Comparison of List Schedules for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Parallel Processing Systems  . . . . . . 685--690
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  N. D. Wallace   Computer Generation of Gamma Random
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Variates with Non-Integral Shape
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691--695
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 A. Salazar and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. V. Oakford   A Graph Formulation of a School
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Scheduling Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . 696--698
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Sherwood C. Chu and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Mones Berman   An Exponential Method for the Solution
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Systems of Ordinary Differential
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Equations  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699--702
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. Pomeranz   ACM Algorithm 487: Exact Cumulative
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Distribution of the Kolmogorov-Smirnov
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Statistic for Small Samples  . . . . . . 703--704
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. P. Brent   ACM Algorithm 488: A Gaussian
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  pseudo-random number generator [G5]  . . 704--706 (or 704--705??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             C. William Skinner   Heuristic Approach to Inductive
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Inference in Fact Retrieval Systems  . . 707--712
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 1, January, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       D. Mitra   Some Aspects of Hierarchical Memory
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54--65
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 6,  Number 10, October, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. E. Millstein   Control Structures in Illiac IV Fortran  157--164
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                T. Sterling and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     V. Lum and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     N. Shu and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      B. Housel   CONVERT: A High Level Translation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Definition Language for Data Conversion  557--567
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 1, January, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Aaron Finerman   Professionalism in the Computing Field   4--9
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    F. L. Bauer   Positivity and Norms . . . . . . . . . . 9--13
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      John Todd   The Lemniscate Constants . . . . . . . . 14--19
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. Peters and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. H. Wilkinson   On the Stability of Gauss-Jordan
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Elimination with Pivoting  . . . . . . . 20--24
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Garrett Birkhoff   Two Hadamard Numbers for Matrices  . . . 25--29
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               A. van der Sluis   Perturbations of Eigenvalues of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Non-Normal Matrices  . . . . . . . . . . 30--36
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Marvin Marcus and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Herbert Robinson   Elementary Divisors of Tensor Products   36--39
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Magnus R. Hestenes   Pseudoinverses and Conjugate Gradients   40--43
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Harlan D. Mills   The New Math of Computer Programming . . 43--48
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Tien Chi Chen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Irving T. Ho   Storage-Efficient Representation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Decimal Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49--52
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Werner Liniger   Connections Between Accuracy and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Stability Properties of Linear Multistep
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53--56
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Richard J. Hanson   Stably Updating Mean and Standard
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Deviation of Data  . . . . . . . . . . . 57--58
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 2, February, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  John McCarthy   Proposed Criterion for a Cipher to be
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Probable-Word Proof  . . . . . . . . . .   ??
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              G. J. Burnett and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             E. G. Coffman, Jr.   Analysis of Interleaved Memory Systems
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Using Blockage Buffers . . . . . . . . . 91--95
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Neil M. Goldman   Sentence Paraphrasing from a Conceptual
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96--106
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       Gordon J. VanderBrug and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Jack Minker   State-Space, Problem-Reduction, and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Theorem Proving --- Some Relationships   107--115
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Carolyn Kimme and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Dana Ballard and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Jack Sklansky   Finding Circles by an Array of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120--122
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 3, March, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             H. C. Johnston and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. A. R. Hoare   Matrix Reduction --- an Efficient Method
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  (school timetables)  . . . . . . . . . . 141--150
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Brian W. Kernighan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Lorinda L. Cherry   A System for Typesetting Mathematics . . 151--157
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. H. Lawrie and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  T. Layman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    D. Baer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. M. Randal   GLYPNIR --- A programming language for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Illiac IV  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157--164
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Robert W. Floyd and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Ronald L. Rivest   Expected Time Bounds for Selection . . . 165--172
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. W. Floyd and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. L. Rivest   ACM Algorithm 489: The Algorithm SELECT
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  -- for Finding the $i$th Smallest of $n$
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173--173
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              A. M. Erisman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. F. Tinney   On Computing Certain Elements of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Inverse of a Sparse Matrix . . . . . . . 177--179
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 L. F. Shampine   Discrete Least Squares Polynomial Fits   179--180
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               A. van der Sluis   Corrigendum: ``Perturbations of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  eigenvalues of non-normal matrices'' . .  180
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. L. Parnas   On a Solution to the Cigarette Smoker's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Problem (Without Conditional Statements) 181--183
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 4, April, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Jack A. Chambers and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ray V. Poore   Computer Networks in Higher Education:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Socio-Economic-Political Factors . . . . 193--199
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             E. S. Ginsberg and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  D. Zaborowski   ACM Algorithm 490: The Dilogarithm
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Function of a Real Argument  . . . . . . 200--202
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 K. K. Shen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. L. Peterson   Corrigendum: ``A Weighted Buddy Method
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Dynamic Storage Allocation'' . . . . 202--202
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Graham Smith   On Maintenance of the Opportunity List
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Class-Teacher Timetable Problems . . 203--208
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    I. C. Braid   The Synthesis of Solids Bounded by Many
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Faces  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209--216
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Vladimir Batagelj   Quadratic Hash Method When the Table
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Size is not a Prime Number . . . . . . . 216--217
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Henry S. Warren, Jr.   A Modification of Warshall's Algorithm
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for the Transitive Closure of Binary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Relations  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218--220
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 James A. Hinds   Algorithm for Locating Adjacent Storage
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Blocks in the Buddy System . . . . . . . 221--222
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Jean G. Vaucher and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Pierre Duval   A Comparison of Simulation Event List
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223--230
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Robert R. Korfhage and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                David W. Matula   On Salazar and Oakford . . . . . . . . . 240--240
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Michael R. Garey and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               David S. Johnson   On Salazar and Oakford . . . . . . . . . 240--241
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 5, May, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                David A. Fisher   Copying Cyclic List Structures in Linear
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Time Using Bounded Workspace . . . . . . 251--252
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Alfonso F. Cardenas   Analysis and Performance of Inverted
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Data Base Structures . . . . . . . . . . 253--263
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Yorick Wilks   An intelligent analyzer and understander
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264--274
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    N. E. Gibbs   ACM Algorithm 491: Basic Cycle
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275--276 (or 275--275??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                D. J. Evans and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 M. Hatzopoulos   A note on the LU factorization of a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  symmetric matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . 278--279
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      B. L. Fox   More on $k$th Shortest Paths . . . . . . 279--279
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                A. I. Wasserman   A problem-list of public policy issues
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  concerning computers and health care . . 279--280
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Harlan D. Mills   Corrigendum: ``The New Math of Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming''  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280--280
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Steven L. Horowitz   Syntactic Algorithm for Peak Detection
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in Waveforms with Applications to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Cardiography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281--285
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Charles E. Pfefferkorn   Heuristic Problem Solving Design System
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Equipment or Furniture Layouts . . . 286--297
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Robert R. Korfhage and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                David W. Matula   More on the Salazar and Oakford Paper    303--303
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 6, June, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    N. E. Gibbs   ACM Algorithm 492: Generation of All the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Cycles of a Graph from a Set of Basic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310--310
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Bui Tuong Phong   Illumination for Computer Generated
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311--317
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  V. Y. Lum and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                M. E. Senko and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. P. Wang and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        H. Ling   A Cost Oriented Algorithm for Data Set
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Allocation in Storage Hierarchies  . . . 318--322
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Alan F. Babich and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                John Grason and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                David L. Parnas   Significant Event Simulation . . . . . . 323--329
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Robert B. K. Dewar   Indirect Threaded Code . . . . . . . . . 330--331
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Ben Cranston and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Rick Thomas   Simplified Recombination Scheme for the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Fibonacci Buddy System . . . . . . . . . 331--332
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Alfred V. Aho and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Margaret J. Corasick   Efficient String Matching: an Aid to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Bibliographic Search . . . . . . . . . . 333--340
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. S. Hirschberg   A Linear Space Algorithm for Computing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Maximal Common Subsequences  . . . . . . 341--343
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Stephen Soule   Addition in an Arbitrary Base Without
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Radix Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 344--346
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               L. H. Harper and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                T. H. Payne and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. E. Savage and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      E. Straus   Sorting $X + Y$  . . . . . . . . . . . . 347--350 (or 347--349??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  F. Paul Wyman   Improved Event-Scanning Mechanisms for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Discrete Event Simulation  . . . . . . . 350--353
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Donald E. Knuth and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Charles T. Zahn, Jr.   Ill-Chosen Use of ``Event''  . . . . . . 360--360
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 7, July, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 P. J. Courtois   Decomposability, Instabilities, and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Saturation in Multiprogramming Systems   371--377
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Soren Lauesen   A large semaphore based operating system 377--389
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Naomi Sager and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Ralph Grishman   Restriction Language for Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Grammars of Natural Language . . . . . . 390--400
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. L. Parnas and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                D. P. Siewiorek   Use of the Concept of Transparency in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  the Design of Hierarchically Structured
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401--408
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 H. Freeman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. Shapira   Determining the Minimum-Area Encasing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Rectangle for an Arbitrary Closed Curve  409--413
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Daniel G. Bobrow   A Note on Hash Linking . . . . . . . . . 413--415
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. E. Weber and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   B. Gilchrist   Discrimination in the employment of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  women in the computer industry . . . . . 416--418
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 8, August, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  John E. Shore   On the External Storage Fragmentation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Produced by First-Fit and Best-Fit
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Allocation Strategies  . . . . . . . . . 433--440
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  A. V. Aho and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              S. C. Johnson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. D. Ullman   Deterministic Parsing of Ambiguous
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Grammars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441--452
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Edsger W. Dijkstra   Guarded Commands, Nondeterminacy and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Formal Derivation of Programs  . . . . . 453--457
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   L. W. Cotton   Remark on stably updating mean and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  standard deviation of data . . . . . . . 458--458
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Stuart C. Shapiro and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Stanley C. Kwasny   Interactive Consulting via Natural
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459--462
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      John Todd   Corrigendum: ``The Lemniscate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Constants''  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462--462
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              J. G. Vaucher and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       P. Duval   Corrigendum: ``A comparison of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  simulation event list algorithms'' . . . 462--462
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    A. J. Smith   Comments on a paper by T. C. Chen and I.
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  T. Ho  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463--463
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Sakti P. Ghosh   Consecutive Storage of Relevant Records
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  with Redundancy  . . . . . . . . . . . . 464--471
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Leslie Lamport   Multiple Byte Processing with Full-Word
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471--475
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Keith Shwayder   Combining Decision Rules in a Decision
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Table  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476--480
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 9, September, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Guy L. Steele, Jr.   Multiprocessing Compactifying Garbage
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495--508
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jon Louis Bentley   Multidimensional Binary Search Trees
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Used for Associative Searching . . . . . 509--517
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               R. Mark Claudson   Digital Simulation of River Plankton
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Population Dynamics  . . . . . . . . . . 517--523
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           William F. Piepmeier   Optimal Balancing of I/O Requests to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Disks  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524--527
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ben Wegbreit   Mechanical Program Analysis  . . . . . . 528--539
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 10, October, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Rob Gerritsen   A Preliminary System for the Design of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  DBTG Data Structures . . . . . . . . . . 551--557
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Nan C. Shu and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Barron C. Housel and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Vincent Y. Lum   CONVERT: A High Level Translation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Definition Language for Data Conversion  557--567
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           John Miles Smith and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Philip Yen-Tang Chang   Optimizing the Performance of a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Relational Algebra Data Base Interface   568--579
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             M. M. Astrahan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. D. Chamberlin   Implementation of a Structured English
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Query Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580--588
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Fanica Gavril   Merging with Parallel Processors . . . . 588--591
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  M. Reiser and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. Kobayashi   Horner's Rule for the Evaluation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  General Closed Queueing Networks . . . . 592--593
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 11, November, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. Salton and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    A. Wong and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     C. S. Yang   A Vector Space Model for Automatic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613--620
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Raymond F. Boyce and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       Donald D. Chamberlin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         W. Frank King, III and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Michael M. Hammer   Specifying Queries as Relational
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Expressions: The Square Data Sublanguage 621--628
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Henry F. Ledgard and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Michael Marcotty   A genealogy of control structures  . . . 629--639
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Susan L. Graham and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Steven P. Rhodes   Practical Syntactic Error Recovery . . . 639--650 (or 639--649??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            James R. Bitner and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Edward M. Reingold   Backtrack Programming Techniques . . . . 651--656
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Lawrence T. Kou and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     C. K. Wong   A Note on the Set Basis Problem Related
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  to the Compaction of Character Sets  . . 656--657
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 18,  Number 12, December, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Peter Naur   Programming Languages, Natural
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Languages, and Mathematics . . . . . . . 676--683
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             John B. Goodenough   Exception Handling: Issues and a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Proposed Notation  . . . . . . . . . . . 683--696
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Mehdi Jazayeri and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           William F. Ogden and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              William C. Rounds   The Intrinsically Exponential Complexity
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of the Circularity Problem for Attribute
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Grammars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697--706
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Harry B. Hunt, III and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Thomas G. Szymanski and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jeffrey D. Ullman   On the Complexity of LR(k) Testing . . . 707--716
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Susan L. Graham and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Mark Wegman   A fast and usually linear algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  global flow analysis . . . . . . . . . . 716--716
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Richard J. Lipton   Reduction: A Method of Proving
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Properties of Parallel Programs  . . . . 717--721
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. T. Schwartz   Automatic Data Structure Choice in a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Language of Very High Level  . . . . . . 722--728
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 1, January, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Leonard Kleinrock and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          William E. Naylor and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Holger Opderbeck   A Study of Line Overhead in the ARPANET  3--13
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Neil C. Wilhelm   An Anomaly in Disk Scheduling: A
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Comparison of FCFS and SSTF Seek
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Scheduling Using an Empirical Model for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Disk Accesses  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--18 (or 13--17??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Carson E. Agnew   On Quadratic Adaptive Routing Algorithms 18--22
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              P. L. Karlton and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               S. H. Fuller and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              R. E. Scroggs and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  E. B. Kaehler   Performance of Height-Balanced Trees . . 23--28
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. J. Florentin   Information Reference Coding . . . . . . 29--33
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Charles R. Litecky and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Gordon B. Davis   Study of Errors, Error-Proneness, and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Error Diagnosis in Cobol . . . . . . . . 33--37
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 2, February, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Donald E. Knuth   Errata: ``Ancient Babylonian
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  algorithms''
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Gregor V. Bochmann   Semantic Evaluation from Left to Right   55--62
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Ronald L. Rivest   On Self-Organizing Sequential Search
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Heuristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63--67
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     F. M. Ives   Permutation Enumeration: Four New
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Permutation Algorithms . . . . . . . . . 68--72
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Alberto Martelli   Application of Heuristic Search Methods
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  to Edge and Contour Detection  . . . . . 73--83
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Kenneth F. Siler   A Stochastic Evaluation Model for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Database Organizations in Data Retrieval
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84--95
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ronald Fagin   A Counterintuitive Example of Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96--97
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Ehud Artzy and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             James A. Hinds and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Harry J. Saal   A Fast Division Technique for Constant
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Divisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98--101
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 3, March, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Allen Newell and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Herbert A. Simon   Computer Science as Empirical Inquiry:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Symbols and Search . . . . . . . . . . . 113--126
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jair M. Babad and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Mario M. Modiano   Joining Policies in a Multipriority
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Multiclass Batch Computer System . . . . 127--136
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                F. E. Allen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       J. Cocke   A Program Data Flow Analysis Procedure   137--147 (or 137--146??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Naftaly Minski   Intentional Resolution of Privacy
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Protection in Database Systems . . . . . 148--159
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     M. Naftaly   Intentional resolution of privacy
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  protection in database systems . . . . . 148--159
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 4, April, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    O. R. Smoot   Development of an international system
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for legal protection of computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171--174
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Bennet P. Lientz   A comparative evaluation of versions of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  BASIC  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175--181
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     J. Raymond   LG: A language for analytic geometry . . 182--187
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ronald Fagin   Corrigendum: ``A Counterintuitive
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Example of Computer Paging'' . . . . . .  187
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Shmuel Katz and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Zohar Manna   Logical Analysis of Programs . . . . . . 188--206
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 5, May, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Dorothy E. Denning   A Lattice Model of Secure Information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236--243
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Jonathan K. Millen   Security Kernel Validation in Practice   243--250
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Butler W. Lampson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Howard E. Sturgis   Reflections on an Operating System
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251--265
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            A. N. Habermann and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Lawrence Flon and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Lee Cooprider   Modularization and Hierarchy in a Family
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . 266--272
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 John H. Howard   Proving Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . 273--279 (or 273--278??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Susan Owicki and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    David Gries   Verifying Properties of Parallel
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programs: An Axiomatic Approach  . . . . 279--285
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           A. Wayne Madison and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Alan P. Batson   Characteristics of Program Localities    285--294
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Barton G. Prieve and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. S. Fabry   VMIN --- an Optimal Variable-Space Page
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Replacement Algorithm  . . . . . . . . . 295--297
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Wesley W. Chu and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Holger Opderbeck   Analysis of the PFF Replacement
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithm via a Semi-Markov Model  . . . 298--304
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 6, June, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              O. E. Taulbee and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. D. Conte   Production and employment of Ph.D.'s in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computer science . . . . . . . . . . . . 311--313
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Dennis G. Severance and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Ricardo A. Duhne   A Practitioner's Guide to Addressing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314--326
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Forest Baskett and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Alan Jay Smith   Interference in Multiprocessor Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems with Interleaved Memory  . . . . 327--334
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Gideon Frieder and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Harry J. Saal   Process for the Determination of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Addresses in Variable Length Addressing  335--338
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  David S. Wise   Referencing Lists by an Edge . . . . . . 338--342
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Helmut Schumacher and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Kenneth C. Sevcik   The synthetic approach to decision table
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343--351
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Douglas W. Clark   An Efficient List Moving Algorithm Using
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  constant Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . 352--354 (or 353--354??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Guy L. Steele, Jr.   Corrigendum: ``Multiprocessing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Compactifying Garbage Collection'' . . . 354--354
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Gary D. Knott   A Numbering System for Permutations of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355--356
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 7, July, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                S. D. Conte and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 M. H. Halstead   Technology of Computer Center
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Management: a Proposed Course for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Graduate Professional Programs in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Science or in Information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369--370
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Robert M. Keller   Formal Verification of Parallel Programs 371--384
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  James C. King   Symbolic Execution and Program Testing   385--394
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Robert M. Metcalfe and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 David R. Boggs   Ethernet: Distributed Packet Switching
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Local Computer Networks  . . . . . . 395--404
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Cheng-Wen Cheng and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Jonas Rabin   Synthesis of Decision Rules  . . . . . . 404--406
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              George S. Fishman   Sampling from the Gamma-distribution on
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407--409
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Kurt Maly   Compressed Tries . . . . . . . . . . . . 409--415
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Warren Burton   A buddy system variation for disk
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  storage allocation . . . . . . . . . . . 416--417
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   G. H. Gonnet   Heaps applied to event driven mechanisms 417--418
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 8, August, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                John J. Donovan   Tools and Philosophy for Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Education  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430--436
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. D. Tennent   The Denotational Semantics of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming Languages  . . . . . . . . . 437--453
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 James H. Clark   Designing Surfaces in 3-D  . . . . . . . 454--460
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Michael A. Harrison and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Walter L. Ruzzo and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jeffrey D. Ullman   Protection in Operating Systems  . . . . 461--471
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. S. Hirschberg   An Insertion Technique for One-Sided
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Height-Balanced Trees  . . . . . . . . . 471--473
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 9, September, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Wesley W. Chu and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Holger Opderbeck   Corrigendum: ``Analysis of the PFF
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  replacement algorithm via a semi-Markov
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  model''
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ben Wegbreit   Corrigendum: ``Faster Retrieval from
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Context Trees''  . . . . . . . . . . . .   ??
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Philip L. Wadler   Analysis of an Algorithm for Real Time
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Garbage Collection . . . . . . . . . . . 491--500
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Chee K. Yap   New Upper Bounds for Selection . . . . . 501--508
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Michael C. Loui   Weighted Derivation Trees  . . . . . . . 509--513
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Kenneth G. Walter   Recursion Analysis for Compiler
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514--516
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            James R. Bitner and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Gideon Ehrlich and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Edward M. Reingold   Efficient Generation of the Binary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Reflected Gray Code and Its Applications 517--521
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           L. Peter Deutsch and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Daniel G. Bobrow   An Efficient, Incremental, Automatic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Garbage Collector  . . . . . . . . . . . 522--526
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ben Wegbreit   Faster Retrieval from Context Trees  . . 526--529
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 10, October, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             James F. Blinn and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Martin E. Newell   Texture and Reflection in Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Generated Images . . . . . . . . . . . . 542--547
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 James H. Clark   Hierarchical Geometric Models for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Visible Surface Algorithms . . . . . . . 547--554
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Joshua Z. Levin   A Parametric Algorithm for Drawing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Pictures of Solid Objects Composed of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Quadric Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . 555--563
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 N. Burtnyk and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        M. Wein   Interactive Skeleton Techniques for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Enhancing Motion Dynamics in Key Frame
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Animation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564--569
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 James W. Frane   The BMD and BMDP Series of Statistical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Programs  . . . . . . . . . . . 570--576
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              C. Duong-Kien and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             H.-J. Hoffmann and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        D. Muth   An improvement to Martin's algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computation of linear precedence
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  functions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576--577
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								 Richard G. Montanelli, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Sandra A. Mamrak   Status of Women and Minorities in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Academic Computer Science  . . . . . . . 578--581
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 11, November, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     D. T. Ross   Homilies for humble standards (computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  applications)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595--600
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Henry F. Ledgard and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                William C. Cave   Cobol Under Control  . . . . . . . . . . 601--608
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Thomas R. Wilcox and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Alan M. Davis and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Michael H. Tindall   Design and Implementation of a Table
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Driven, Interactive Diagnostic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming System . . . . . . . . . . . 609--616
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Frank Rubin   Experiments in Text File Compression . . 617--623 (or 617--622??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              K. P. Eswaran and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. N. Gray and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. A. Lorie and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  I. L. Traiger   The notions of consistency and predicate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  locks in a database system . . . . . . . 624--633
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                K. Maruyama and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. E. Smith   Optimal Reorganization of Distributed
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Space Disk Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 634--642
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Richard G. Hamlet   High-Level Binding with Low-Level
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Linkers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642--644
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number 12, December, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Jean E. Sammet   Roster of Programming Languages for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  1974--75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655--669
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Bruce W. Arden   The Computer Science and Engineering
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Research Study (COSERS)  . . . . . . . . 670--673
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       J. F. Nunamaker, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								     Benn R. Konsynski, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Thomas Ho and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Carl Singer   Computer-Aided Analysis and Design of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Information Systems  . . . . . . . . . . 674--687
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            George Stockman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Laveen Kanal and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     M. C. Kyle   Structural Pattern Recognition of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Carotid Pulse Waves Using a General
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Waveform Parsing System  . . . . . . . . 688--695
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 1, January, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Allen van Gelder   Structured programming in COBOL: an
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  approach for application programmers . . 2--12
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Richard H. Austing and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Bruce H. Barnes and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Gerald L. Engel   A Survey of the Literature in Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Science Education Since Curriculum '68   13--21
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Jair M. Babad   A Record and File Partitioning Model . . 22--31 (or 22--30??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Albert L. Zobrist and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								      Frederick R. Carlson, Jr.   Detection of Combined Occurrences  . . . 31--36 (or 31--35??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               A. P. Batson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. E. Brundage   Segment Sizes and Lifetimes in Algol 60
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36--44
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    David Gries   On Believing Programs to be Correct  . . 49--50
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 2, February, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Mervin E. Muller   An Approach to Multidimensional Data
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Array Processing by Computer . . . . . . 63--77
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Douglas W. Clark and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               C. Cordell Green   An Empirical Study of List Structure in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  LISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78--87
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            F. P. Preparata and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     S. J. Hong   Convex Hulls of Finite Sets of Points in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Two and Three Dimensions . . . . . . . . 87--93
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               M. C. Easton and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  B. T. Bennett   Transient-Free Working-Set Statistics    93--99
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Jack Bresenham   A Linear Algorithm for Incremental
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Digital Display of Circular Arcs . . . . 100--106
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Thoddi C. T. Kotiah and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             David I. Steinberg   Occurrences of Cycling and Other
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Phenomena Arising in a Class of Linear
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming Models . . . . . . . . . . . 107--112
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Gary D. Knott   A Numbering System for Binary Trees  . . 113--115
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 3, March, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Philip Clapson   Improving the Access Time for Random
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Access Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127--135
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   C. T. Yu and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      G. Salton   Effective Information Retrieval Using
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Term Accuracy  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135--142
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Amund Lunde   Empirical Evaluation of Some Features of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Instruction Set Processor Architectures  143--153
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                R. M. Brown and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. C. Browne and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   K. M. Chandy   Memory Management and Response Time  . . 153--165
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Warren Burton   Representation of Many-Sided Polygons
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and Polygonal Lines for Rapid Processing 166--171
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            H. B. Hunt, III and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            T. G. Szymanski and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. D. Ullman   Operations on Sparse Relations . . . . . 171--176
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Richard L. Nolan   Effects of Chargeout on User/Manager
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Attitudes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177--185
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Israel Borovits and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Philip Ein-Dor   Cost/utilization: A measure of system
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  performance  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185--191
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        C. Bays   A comparison of next-fit, first-fit, and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  best-fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191--192
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Eberhard Bertsch   The storage requirement in precedence
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  parsing  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192--196 (or 192--194??)
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 4, April, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       James H. Morris, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ben Wegbreit   Subgoal Induction  . . . . . . . . . . . 209--222
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Steven L. Tanimoto and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Theodosios Pavlidis   Editing of Picture Segmentations Using
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Local Analysis of Graphs . . . . . . . . 223--229
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Nicholas V. Findler   Studies in Machine Cognition Using the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Game of Poker  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230--245
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                K. Maruyama and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. E. Smith   Analysis of Design Alternatives for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Virtual Memory Indexes . . . . . . . . . 245--254
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Henry C. Lucas, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Jimmy A. Sutton   Stage Hypothesis and the S-Curve: Some
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Contradictory Evidence . . . . . . . . . 254--259
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      S. B. Yao   Approximating block accesses in database
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  organizations  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260--261
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                C. R. Hollander   Remark on uniform insertion on
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  structured data structures . . . . . . . 261--262
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            S. K. Bandyopadhyay   Comment on weighted increment linear
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  search for scatter tables  . . . . . . . 262--263
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             C. D. Thompson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     H. T. Kung   Sorting on a Mesh-Connected Parallel
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263--271
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Lawrence Robinson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Karl N. Levitt   Proof Techniques for Hierarchically
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Structured Programs  . . . . . . . . . . 271--283
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 5, May, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. C. Holt and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              D. B. Wortman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              D. T. Barnard and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. R. Cordy   SP/k: A System for Teaching Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301--309
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              George S. Fishman   Achieving Specific Accuracy in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Simulation Output Analysis . . . . . . . 310--315
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Howard L. Morgan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   K. Dan Levin   Optimal Program and Data Locations in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Networks  . . . . . . . . . . . 315--322
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J.-L. Baer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      B. Schwab   A Comparison of Tree-Balancing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322--330
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Neil J. Stillman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 P. Bruce Berra   A Comparison of Hardware and Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Associative Memories in the Context of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Graphics  . . . . . . . . . . . 331--339
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Marvin Shapiro   Choice of Reference Points in Best-Match
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  File Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339--343
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Michael Z. Hanani   An Optimal Evaluation of Boolean
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Expressions in an Online Query System    344--347
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Y. Milman   An Approach to Optimal Design of Storage
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Parameters in Databases  . . . . . . . . 347--350
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              James W. Hunt and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Thomas G. Szymanski   A Fast Algorithm for Computing Longest
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Common Subsequences  . . . . . . . . . . 350--353
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 6, June, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Orrin E. Taulbee and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. D. Conte   Production and Employment of Ph.D.'s in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Science --- 1976  . . . . . . . 370--372
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Ben Shneiderman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Richard Mayer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Don McKay and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Peter Heller   Experimental Investigations of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Utility of Detailed Flowcharts in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373--381
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              H. F. Ledgard and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. W. Taylor   Two Views of Data Abstraction  . . . . . 382--384
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Moshe M. Zloof and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               S. Peter de Jong   The System for Business Automation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  (SBA): Programming Language  . . . . . . 385--396
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 John V. Guttag   Abstract Data Types and the Development
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Data Structures . . . . . . . . . . . 396--404
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           John Miles Smith and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Diane C. P. Smith   Database Abstractions: Aggregation . . . 405--413
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                David Gries and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Narain Gehani   Some Ideas on Data Types in High-Level
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Languages  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414--420
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          James L. Peterson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Theodore A. Norman   Buddy Systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421--431
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. M. Robson   A Bounded Storage Algorithm for Copying
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Cyclic Structures  . . . . . . . . . . . 431--433
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. S. Bird   Notes on Recursion Elimination . . . . . 434--439
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Henry S. Warren, Jr.   Functions Realizable with Word-Parallel
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Logical and Two's-Complement Addition
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439--441
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 7, July, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Sandra A. Mamrak   Dynamic Response Time Prediction for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Networks  . . . . . . . . . . . 461--468
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Manfred Ruschitzka and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. S. Fabry   A Unifying Approach to Scheduling  . . . 469--477
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          William D. Tajibnapis   A Correctness Proof of a Topology
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Information Maintenance Protocol for a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Distributed Computer Network . . . . . . 477--485
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Paul G. Heckel and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Butler W. Lampson   A terminal-oriented communication system 486--494
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								    Ben Ross Schneider, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Reid M. Watts   SITAR: an Interactive Text Processing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  System for Small Computers . . . . . . . 495--499
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. L. W. Kessels   Alternative to Event Queues for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Synchronization in Monitors  . . . . . . 500--503
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Dorothy E. Denning and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Peter J. Denning   Certification of Programs for Secure
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Information Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . 504--513
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Jeffrey M. Barth   Shifting Garbage Collection Overhead to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Compile Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513--518
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             E. A. Ashcroft and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    W. W. Wadge   Lucid, a Nonprocedural Language with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Iteration  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519--526
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              J. Nevil Brownlee   An Algol-based implementation of SNOBOL
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  4 patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527--529
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 8, August, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Charles M. Geschke and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       James H. Morris, Jr. and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Edwin H. Satterthwaite   Early Experience with Mesa . . . . . . . 540--553
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Mary Shaw and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            William A. Wulf and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Ralph L. London   Abstraction and Verification in Alphard:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Defining and Specifying Iteration and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553--564
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Barbara Liskov and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Alan Snyder and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Russell Atkinson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Craig Schaffert   Abstraction Mechanisms in CLU  . . . . . 564--576
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Niklaus Wirth   Toward a Discipline of Real-Time
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577--583
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. D. Gannon   An experimental evaluation of data type
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  conventions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584--595
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               W. R. Franta and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Kurt Maly   An Efficient Data Structure for the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Simulation Event Set . . . . . . . . . . 596--602
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Eugene L. Lawler   Comment on computing the $k$ shortest
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  paths in a graph . . . . . . . . . . . . 603--604
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     N. Francez   Another advantage of keyword notation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for parameter communication with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  subprograms  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604--605
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 9, September, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Michael O. Rabin   Complexity of Computations . . . . . . . 625--633
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Dana S. Scott   Logic and Programming Languages  . . . . 634--641
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Richard H. Austing   The GRE Advanced Test in Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Science  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642--645
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Robert W. Scheifler   An Analysis of Inline Substitution for a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Structured Programming Language  . . . . 647--654
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               David K. Gifford   Hardware Estimation of a Process'
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Primary Memory Requirements  . . . . . . 655--663
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Harry G. Mairson   Some New Upper Bounds on the Generation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Prime Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 664--669
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Edward M. McCreight   Pagination of B*-Trees with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Variable-Length Records  . . . . . . . . 670--674
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 10, October, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. Fuchs and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Z. M. Kedem and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  S. P. Uselton   Optimal Surface Reconstruction from
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Planar Contours  . . . . . . . . . . . . 693--702
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Sheng-Chuan C. Wu and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               John F. Abel and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Donald P. Greenberg   An Interactive Computer Graphics
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Approach to Surface Representation . . . 703--712
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Barry K. Rosen   High-Level Data Flow Analysis  . . . . . 712--724
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              C. Montangero and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  G. Pacini and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      F. Turini   Two-Level Control Structure for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Nondeterministic Programming . . . . . . 725--730
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Wilf R. LaLonde   Regular Right Part Grammars and Their
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Parsers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731--741
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   R. Devillers   Game Interpretation of the Deadlock
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Avoidance Problem  . . . . . . . . . . . 741--745
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Evan L. Ivie   Programmer's Workbench --- a Machine for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Software Development . . . . . . . . . . 746--753
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Alan Jay Smith   Multiprocessor Memory Organization and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Memory Interference  . . . . . . . . . . 754--761
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Robert S. Boyer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              J. Strother Moore   A Fast String Searching Algorithm  . . . 762--772
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 11, November, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. A. N. Lee   Considerations for future programming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  language standards activities  . . . . . 788--794
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Rollins Turner and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Bill Strecker   Use of the LRU Stack Depth Distribution
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Simulation of Paging Behavior  . . . 795--798
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Franklin C. Crow   The Aliasing Problem in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer-Generated Shaded Images . . . . 799--805
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Leslie Lamport   Concurrent Reading and Writing . . . . . 806--811
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  John E. Shore   Anomalous Behavior of the Fifty-Percent
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Rule in Dynamic Memory Allocation  . . . 812--820
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             G. C. Stockman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 A. K. Agrawala   Equivalence of Hough curve detection to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  template matching  . . . . . . . . . . . 820--822
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       N. Wirth   What can we do about the unnecessary
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  diversity of notation for syntactic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  definitions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822--823
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      M. K. Roy   A note on reflection-free permutation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  enumeration  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823--823
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Zohar Manna and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Adi Shamir   The Optimal Approach to Recursive
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824--831
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Michael Hammer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              W. Gerry Howe and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Vincent J. Kruskal and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Irving Wladawsky   Very High Level Programming Language for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Data Processing Applications . . . . . . 832--840
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Renzo Sprugnoli   Perfect Hashing Functions: A Single
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Probe Retrieving Method for Static Sets  841--850
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 John Cocke and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Ken Kennedy   An Algorithm for Reduction of Operator
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850--856
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. S. Bird   Improving Programs by the Introduction
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Recursion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856--863
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Norman R. Nielsen   Dynamic Memory Allocation in Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864--873
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Michael W. Blasgen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Richard G. Casey and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Kapali P. Eswaran   An Encoding Method for Multifield
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Sorting and Indexing . . . . . . . . . . 874--878
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Enrique Grapa and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Geneva G. Belford   Some Theorems to Aid in Solving the File
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Allocation Problem . . . . . . . . . . . 878--882
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 20,  Number 12, December, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                A. A. Lopez and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. Raymond and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. Tardiff   A survey of computer science offerings
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in small liberal arts colleges . . . . . 902--906
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. L. W. Kessels   A Conceptual Framework for a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Nonprocedural Programming Language . . . 906--913
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             J. Lawrence Carter   A Case Study of a New Code Generation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Technique for Compilers  . . . . . . . . 914--920
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    David Gries   An Exercise in Proving Parallel Programs
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Correct  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921--930
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Irene Grief   A language for formal problem
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  specification  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931--935
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Marshall D. Abrams and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Siegfried Treu   A Methodology for Interactive Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Service Measurement  . . . . . . . . . . 936--944
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             J. N. Danziger and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   W. H. Dutton   Computers as an innovation in American
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  local governments  . . . . . . . . . . . 945--956
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 24,  Number 1, January, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  P. D. Summers   A Methodology for LISP Program
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Construction from Examples . . . . . . . 161--175
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                S. H. Lavington   The Manchester Mark I and Atlas: a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  historical perspective . . . . . . . . . 4--12
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               R. N. Ibbett and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    P. C. Capon   The development of the MU5 computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--24
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            B. R. Borgerson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               M. L. Hanson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  P. A. Hartley   Evolution of the Sperry Univac 1100
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Series: a History, Analysis, and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25--43
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. G. Bell and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   A. Kotok and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             T. N. Hastings and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        R. Hill   The Evolution of the DECsystem 10  . . . 44--63
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Richard M. Russell   The CRAY-1 Computer System . . . . . . . 63--72
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Richard P. Case and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Andris Padegs   Architecture of the IBM System/370 . . . 73--96
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 2, February, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               S. A. Mamrak and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          R. G. Montanelli, Jr.   Computer science faculties: the current
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  status of minorities and women . . . . . 115--119
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               R. L. Rivest and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  A. Shamir and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     L. Adelman   A Method for Obtaining Digital
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Signatures and Public-Key Cryptosystems  120--126
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            M. A. Auslander and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   H. R. Strong   Systematic Recursion Removal . . . . . . 127--134
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  L. T. Kou and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           L. J. Stockmeyer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     C. K. Wong   Covering Edges by Cliques with Regard to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Keyword Conflicts and Intersection
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135--139
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Gerald Held and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Michael Stonebraker   B-Trees Re-Examined  . . . . . . . . . . 139--143
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             William J. Stewart   A Comparison of Numerical Techniques in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Markov Modeling  . . . . . . . . . . . . 144--152
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Gabor T. Herman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Arnold Lent and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Peter H. Lutz   Relaxation Methods for Image
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152--158
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Zohar Manna and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Richard Waldinger   Is `Sometime' Sometimes Better Than
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  `Always'? (Intermittent Assertions in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Proving Program Correctness) . . . . . . 159--172
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Bruce J. Schachter and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Azriel Rosenfeld   Some New Methods of Detecting Step Edges
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in Digital Pictures  . . . . . . . . . . 172--176
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 3, March, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Michael O. Rabin   Corrigendum: ``Complexity of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computations''
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Henry C. Lucas, Jr.   Use of an Interactive Information
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Storage and Retrieval System in Medical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Research . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197--205
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          William H. Dutton and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Kenneth L. Kraemer   Management Utilization of Computers in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  American Local Governments . . . . . . . 206--218
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. E. Anderson   Value orientation of computer science
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219--225
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                S. Rao Kosaraju   Insertions and Deletions in One-Sided
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Height-Balanced Trees  . . . . . . . . . 226--227
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Richard A. DeMillo and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       Stanley C. Eisenstat and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Richard J. Lipton   Preserving Average Proximity in Arrays   228--231
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             M. A. Franklin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            G. Scott Graham and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. K. Gupta   Anomalies with Variable Partition Paging
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232--236
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Andrew S. Tanenbaum   Implications of Structured Programming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for Machine Architecture . . . . . . . . 237--246
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 4, April, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                W. H. Payne and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 K. L. McMillen   Orderly Enumeration of Nonsingular
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Binary Matrices Applied to Text
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259--263
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Paul Heckel   A Technique for Isolating Differences
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Between Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264--268
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        Art Lew   Optimal Conversion of Extended-Entry
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Decision Tables with General Cost
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269--279
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Henry G. Baker, Jr.   List Processing in Real Time on a Serial
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280--294
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Ralph C. Merkle   Secure Communications Over Insecure
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294--299
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Thomas G. Szymanski   Assembling Code for machines with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Span-Dependent Instructions  . . . . . . 300--308
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Jean Vuillemin   A Data Structure for Manipulating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Priority Queues  . . . . . . . . . . . . 309--315
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. Even and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       M. Rodeh   Economical Encoding of Commas Between
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Strings  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315--317
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. C. H. Cheng   Generating beta variates with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  nonintegral shape parameters . . . . . . 317--322
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 5, May, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Douglas W. Clark   A Fast Algorithm for Copying List
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351--357
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Anita K. Jones and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Barbara H. Liskov   A Language Extension for Expressing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Constraints on Data Access . . . . . . . 358--367
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Matthew Geller   Test Data as an Aid in Proving Program
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Correctness  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368--375
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   James R. Low   Automatic Data Structure Selection: an
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Example and Overview . . . . . . . . . . 376--385
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Michael Karr and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           David B. Loveman III   Incorporation of Units into Programming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Languages  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385--391
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            David R. Hanson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Ralph E. Griswold   The SL5 procedure mechanism  . . . . . . 392--400
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       Frederick Hayes-Roth and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 John McDermott   An Interference Matching Technique for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Inducing Abstractions  . . . . . . . . . 401--411
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             J. M. Fleisher and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. R. Meyer   New Sufficient Optimality Conditions for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Integer Programming and Their
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Application  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411--418
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Pandu R. Tadikamalla   Computer Generation of Gamma Random
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Variables  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419--422
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Richard L. Sites   Optimal Shift Strategy for a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Block-Transfer CCD Memory  . . . . . . . 423--425
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 6, June, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               S. H. Zweben and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 M. A. McDonald   An Optimal Method for Deletion in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  One-Sided Height-Balanced Trees  . . . . 441--445
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          James R. Driscoll and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Y. Edmund Lien   A Selective Traversal Algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Binary Search Trees  . . . . . . . . . . 445--447
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jacques Cohen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Martin S. Roth   Analyses of Deterministic Parsing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448--458
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         M. Dennis Mickunas and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  John A. Modry   Automatic Error Recovery for LR Parsers  459--465
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               B. P. Lientz and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              E. B. Swanson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 G. E. Tompkins   Characteristics of Application Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Maintenance  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466--471
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Earl Chrysler   Some Basic Determinants of Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming Productivity . . . . . . . . 472--483
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Rob Kling   Automated Welfare Client-Tracking and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Service Integration: the Political
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Economy of Computing . . . . . . . . . . 484--493
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 E. Gelenbe and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  D. Derochette   Performance of Rollback Recovery Systems
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Under Intermittent Failures  . . . . . . 493--499
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Toby J. Teorey   General Equations for Idealized CPU-I/O
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Overlap Configurations . . . . . . . . . 500--507
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 7, July, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 David L. Waltz   An English Language Query Answering
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  System for a Large Relational Data Base  526--539
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Michael L. Fredman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Bruce Weide   On the complexity of computing the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  measure of $\bigcup[a_i,b_i]$  . . . . . 540--544
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Francis Y. Chin   An ${O}(n)$ Algorithm for Determining a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Near-Optimal Computation Order of Matrix
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Chain Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544--549
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Yehoshua Perl and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Alon Itai and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Haim Avni   Interpolation Search --- A Log Log N
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550--553
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       Constantine Halatsis and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             George Philokyprou   Pseudochaining in Hash Tables  . . . . . 554--557
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Leslie Lamport   Time, Clocks, and the Ordering of Events
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in a Distributed System  . . . . . . . . 558--565
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Henry Givens Baker, Jr.   Shallow Binding in Lisp 1.5  . . . . . . 565--569
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Hanan Samet   Proving the Correctness of Heuristically
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Optimized Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570--582
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Robert E. Shostak   An Algorithm for Reasoning About
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Equality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583--585
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Rahul Chattergy and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Udo W. Pooch   Analysis of the Availability of Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems Using Computer-Aided Algebra . . 586--591
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Lawrence Snyder   B-Trees Re-examined  . . . . . . . . . . 594--594
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 8, August, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    John Backus   Can Programming Be Liberated From the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  von Neumann Style? A Functional Style
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and its Algebra of Programs  . . . . . . 613--641
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       R. Kling   Value conflicts and social choice in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  electronic funds transfer system
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  developments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642--657
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               D. S. Hirschberg   Fast Parallel Sorting Algorithms . . . . 657--661
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             F. Lockwood Morris   A Time- and Space-Efficient Garbage
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Compaction Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . 662--665
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. A. R. Hoare   Communicating Sequential Processes . . . 666--677
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Richard S. Brice and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. C. Browne   Feedback Coupled Resource Allocation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Policies in the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Multiprogramming-Multiprocessor Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678--686
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Peter Scheuermann and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              C. Robert Carlson   Self-Assessment Procedure V: a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  self-assessment procedure dealing with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  database systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 687--693
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 9, September, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               R. A. Harris and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     J. D. Zund   An algorithm using symbolic techniques
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for the Bel-Petrov classification of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  gravitational fields . . . . . . . . . . 715--717
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                H. D. Schwetman   Hybrid Simulation Models of Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718--723
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Jeffrey M. Barth   A Practical Interprocedural Data Flow
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Analysis Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . 724--736
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Gerald J. Popek and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                David A. Farber   Model for Verification of Data Security
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . 737--749
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Peter J. Denning and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Donald R. Slutz   Generalized Working Sets for Segment
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Reference Strings  . . . . . . . . . . . 750--759
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Glenford J. Myers   Controlled Experiment in Program Testing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and Code Walkthroughs/Inspections  . . . 760--768
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Th. Ottmann and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  H. W. Six and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        D. Wood   Right Brother Trees  . . . . . . . . . . 769--776
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Ernst G. Ulrich   Event Manipulation for Discrete
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Simulations Requiring Large Numbers of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777--785
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        K. Maly   A note on virtual memory indexes . . . . 786--787
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Stephen A. Ward   Real Time Plotting of Approximate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Contour Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788--790
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   A. Tenenbaum   Simulations of dynamic sequential search
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790--791
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 10, October, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Walt Brainerd   Fortran 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806--820
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 D. Towsley and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               K. M. Chandy and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. C. Browne   Models for Parallel Processing Within
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programs: Application to CPU:I/O and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  I/O:I/O Overlap  . . . . . . . . . . . . 821--831
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Ben Shneiderman   Jump Searching: A Fast Sequential Search
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Technique  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831--834
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Shi-Kuo Chang and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Yin-Wah Wong   Optimal Histogram Matching by Monotone
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Gray Level Transformation  . . . . . . . 835--840
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Robert Morris   Counting Large Numbers of Events in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Small Registers  . . . . . . . . . . . . 840--842
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Colin L. McMaster   An Analysis of Algorithms for the Dutch
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  National Flag Problem  . . . . . . . . . 842--846
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Robert Sedgewick   Implementing Quicksort Programs  . . . . 847--857
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Gordon Lyon   Packed Scatter Tables  . . . . . . . . . 857--865
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Malcolm C. Easton and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Ronald Fagin   Cold-Start Vs. Warm-Start Miss Ratios    866--872
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               W. R. Franta and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Kurt Maly   A comparison of heaps and the TL
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  structure for the simulation event set   873--875
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 11, November, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Norman R. Lyons   Systems Design Education: a Gaming
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889--895
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. W. Wendorf   A Simply Extended and Modified Batch
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Environment Graphical System (Sembegs)   897--904
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   B. Kumar and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 E. S. Davidson   Performance Evaluation of Highly
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Concurrent Computers by Deterministic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904--913
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Berthold K. P. Horn and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Brett L. Bachman   Using Synthetic Images to Register Real
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Images with Surface Models . . . . . . . 914--924
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              P. R. Tadikamalla   Computer Generation of Gamma Random
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Variables --- II . . . . . . . . . . . . 925--928
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                G. David Ripley   Simple Recovery-Only Procedure for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Simple Precedence Parsers  . . . . . . . 928--930
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             D. P. Friedman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     D. S. Wise   A Note on Conditional Expressions  . . . 931--933
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Per Brinch Hansen   Distributed Processes: A Concurrent
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programming Concept  . . . . . . . . . . 934--941
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Fabrizio Luccio and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Linda Pagli   Power Trees  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941--947
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    B. A. Sheil   Median Split Trees: A Fast Lookup
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Technique for Frequently Occurring Keys  947--958
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. A. R. Hoare   Corrigendum: ``Communicating Sequential
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Processes''  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958--958
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Eugene C. Freuder   Synthesizing Constraint Expressions  . . 958--966
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Edsger W. Dijkstra and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Leslie Lamport and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               A. J. Martin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             C. S. Scholten and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              E. F. M. Steffens   On-the-Fly Garbage Collection: An
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Exercise in Cooperation  . . . . . . . . 966--975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 21,  Number 12, December, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    David Gries   Corrigendum: ``An exercise in proving
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  parallel programs correct''
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Roger M. Needham and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Michael D. Schroeder   Using Encryption for Authentication in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Large Networks of Computers  . . . . . . 993--999
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                David Gries and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Jayadev Misra   A Linear Sieve Algorithm for Finding
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Prime Numbers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999--1003
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          James L. Peterson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            James R. Bitner and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 John H. Howard   The Selection of Optimal Tab Settings    1004--1007
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          James C. Wetherbe and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 V. Thomas Dock   Strategic Planning Methodology for the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computing Effort in Higher Education: an
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Empirical Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . 1008--1015
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                M. Ibramsha and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   V. Rajaraman   Detection of Logical Errors in Decision
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Table Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016--1025
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Alberto Martelli and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Ugo Montanari   Optimizing Decision Trees Through
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Heuristically Guided Search  . . . . . . 1025--1039
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Yogen K. Dalal and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Robert M. Metcalfe   Reverse Path Forwarding of Broadcast
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Packets  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040--1048
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             John V. Guttag and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Ellis Horowitz and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                David R. Musser   Abstract Data Types and Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048--1064
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Jay M. Spitzen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Karl N. Levitt and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Lawrence Robinson   An Example of Hierarchical Design and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Proof  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064--1075
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 23,  Number 4, May, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  J. L. Bentley   Multidimensional Divide-and-Conquer  . . 214--228
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 1, January, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  John W. Boyse   Interference Detection Among Solids and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Kent W. Colton   The impact and use of computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  technology by the police . . . . . . . . 10--20
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								     Gian Carlo Bongiovanni and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Fabrizio Luccio   Permutation of Data Blocks in a Bubble
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21--25
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Charles H. Sauer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 K. Mani Chandy   The Impact of Distributions and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Disciplines on Multiple Processor
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25--34
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              J. P. Banatre and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              J. P. Routeau and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    L. Trilling   An event-driven compiling technique  . . 34--42
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Jacques J. Arsac   Syntactic Source to Source Transforms
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and Program Manipulation . . . . . . . . 43--54
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 2, February, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              O. E. Taulbee and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. D. Conte   Production and employment of Ph.D.s in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  computer science --- 1977 and 1978 . . . 75--76
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. E. Fairley   Employment characteristics of doctoral
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  level computer scientists  . . . . . . . 77--78
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 W. E. Gull and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  M. A. Jenkins   Recursive data structures in APL.  . . . 79--96
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   E. Morel and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    C. Renvoise   Global Optimization by Suppression of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Partial Redundancies . . . . . . . . . . 96--103
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             M. R. Anderson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 M. G. Anderson   Comments on Perfect Hashing Functions: A
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Single Probe Retrieving Method for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Static Sets  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104--105
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          David R. Cheriton and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Michael A. Malcolm and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Lawrence S. Melen and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Gary R. Sager   Thoth, a Portable Real-Time Operating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105--115
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              David P. Reed and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Rajendra K. Kanodia   Synchronization with Eventcounts and
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Sequencers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115--123
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Haim Mendelson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Joseph S. Pliskin and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Uri Yechiali   Optimal Storage Allocation for Serial
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124--130
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 3, March, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Richard H. Austing and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Bruce H. Barnes and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Della T. Bonnette and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Gerald L. Engel and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Gordon Stokes   Curriculum '78: Recommendations for the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Undergraduate Program in Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Science --- A Report of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Curriculum Committee on Computer Science 147--166
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Albert D. Edgar and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Samuel C. Lee   FOCUS microcomputer number system  . . . 166--177
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   James Slagle   Experiments with Some Algorithms that
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Find Central Solutions for Pattern
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178--183
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Amaryllis Deliyanni and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Robert A. Kowalski   Logic and Semantic Networks  . . . . . . 184--192
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Dalia Motzkin   Use of Normal Multiplication Tables for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Information Storage and Retrieval  . . . 193--207
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 C. L. McMaster   Corrigendum: ``An Analysis of Algorithms
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for the Dutch National Flag Problem''    207--207
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 4, April, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Arthur M. Lesk   Detection of Three-Dimensional Patterns
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Atoms in Chemical Structures  . . . . 219--224
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 E. G. Cale and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           L. L. Gremillion and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. L. McKenney   Price/Performance Patterns of U.S.
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 225--233
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Giacomo Bucci and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Donald N. Streeter   Methodology for the Design of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Distributed Information Systems  . . . . 233--245
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Richard J. Hanson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             John A. Wisniewski   A Mathematical Programming Updating
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Method Using Modified Givens
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Transformations and Applied to LP
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245--251
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Daniel Brelaz   New Methods to Color the Vertices of a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Graph  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251--256
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 5, May, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Richard A. De Millo and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Richard J. Lipton and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Alan J. Perlis   Social Processes and Proofs of Theorems
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271--280
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Ernest Chang and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Rosemary Roberts   An Improved Algorithm for Decentralized
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Extrema-Finding in Circular
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Configurations of Processors . . . . . . 281--283
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 T. D. Sterling   Consumer Difficulties with Computerized
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Transactions: an Empirical Investigation 283--289
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               John C. Reynolds   Reasoning About Arrays . . . . . . . . . 290--299
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Michael J. Manthey   Model for and Discussion of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Multi-Interpreter Systems  . . . . . . . 299--309
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 6, June, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. S. Lemos   An implementation of structured
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  walk-throughs in teaching COBAL
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  programming  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335--340
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            S. N. Busenberg and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      W. C. Tam   An academic program providing realistic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  training in software engineering . . . . 341--345
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Steven Alter   Model for Automating File and Program
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Design in Business Application Systems   345--353
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Jerome A. Feldman   High Level Programming for Distributed
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computing  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353--368
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Robert Sedgewick   Corrigendum: ``Implementing Quicksort
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Programs'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368--368
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 R. Shapira and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     H. Freeman   The Cyclic Order Property of Vertices as
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  an Aid in Scene Analysis . . . . . . . . 368--375
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 7, July, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    T. Winograd   Beyond Programming Languages . . . . . . 391--401
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                F. P. Preparata   An Optimal Real-Time Algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Planar Convex Hulls  . . . . . . . . . . 402--405
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Patrick C. Fischer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Robert L. Probert   Storage Reorganization Techniques for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Matrix Computation in a Paging
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Environment  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405--415
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. H. Hine and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 I. Mitrani and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                        S. Tsur   The Control of Response Times in
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Multi-Class Systems by Memory Allocation 415--424
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Robert A. Kowalski   Algorithm = Logic + Control  . . . . . . 424--436
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 8, August, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 J. W. Wong and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                G. Scott Graham   Self-Assessment Procedure VI: a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  self-assessment procedure dealing with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  queueing network models of computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  systems  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449--454
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. W. Floyd   The paradigms of programming . . . . . . 455--460
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           D. S. Hirschberg and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              A. K. Chandra and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  D. V. Sarwate   Computing Connected Components on
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Parallel Computers . . . . . . . . . . . 461--464
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Nachum Dershowitz and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Zohar Manna   Proving Termination with Multiset
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Orderings  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465--476
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Dorothy E. Denning   Secure Personal Computing in an Insecure
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Network  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476--482
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   L. S. Nelson   Further remark on stably updating mean
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and standard deviation estimates . . . . 483--483
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 9, September, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          Jerome A. Feldman and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								          William R. Sutherland   Rejuvenating Experimental Computer
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Science --- A Report to the National
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Science Foundation and Others  . . . . . 497--502
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								   Daniel D. McCracken, CCP and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Peter J. Denning and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               David H. Brandin   Addendum: An ACM Executive Committee
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Position on the Crisis in Experimental
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Computer Science . . . . . . . . . . . . 503--504
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      Zvi Galil   On Improving the Worse Case Running Time
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of the Boyer-Moore String Matching
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Algorithm  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505--508
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								           Kari-Jouko Raiha and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Stuart H. Zweben   An Optimal Insertion Algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  One-Sided Height-Balanced Binary Search
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Trees  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508--512
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Wilfred J. Hansen   Progressive acyclic digraphs --- a tool
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  for database integrity . . . . . . . . . 513--518
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    G. Nagy and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    S. G. Wagle   Approximation of Polygonal Maps by
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Cellular Maps  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518--525
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 T. F. Chan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. G. Lewis   Computing standard deviations: accuracy  526--531
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  D. H. D. West   Updating mean and variance estimates: an
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  improved method  . . . . . . . . . . . . 532--535
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 10, October, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    P. D. Laird   Comment on: ``An optimal evaluation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Boolean expressions in an online query
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  system'' [Comm. ACM, 20, 1977, no. 5,
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  344--347, MR 55 #9627] by M. Z. Hanani   549--550
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Ehud Gudes and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Anthony Hoffman   A note on: ``An optimal evaluation of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Boolean expressions in an online query
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  system'' [Comm. ACM, 20, 1977, no. 5,
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  344--347, MR 55 #9627] by M. Z. Hanani   550--553
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             M. R. Anderson and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 M. G. Anderson   Corrigendum: ``Comments on Perfect
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Hashing Functions: A Single Probe
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Retrieving Method for Static Sets''  . .  553
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Leslie Lamport   On the Proof of Correctness of a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Calendar Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 554--556
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Paul Klint   Line Numbers Made Cheap  . . . . . . . . 557--559
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								         Tomas Lozano-Perez and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Michael A. Wesley   An Algorithm for Planning Collision-Free
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Paths Among Polyhedral Obstacles . . . . 560--570
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   F. L. Morris   On a Comparison of Garbage Collection
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  571
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 11, November, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. E. Mayer   A psychology of learning BASIC . . . . . 589--593
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  R. Morris and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    K. Thompson   Password Security --- A Case History . . 594--597
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Shmuel Peleg and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Azriel Rosenfeld   Breaking Substitution Ciphers Using a
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Relaxation Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . 598--605
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								        Robert Endre Tarjan and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Andrew Chi Chih Yao   Storing a Sparse Table . . . . . . . . . 606--611
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     Adi Shamir   How to Share a Secret  . . . . . . . . . 612--613
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 22,  Number 12, December, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    A. H. Lipis   Costs of the current US payments system  644--647
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     R. H. Long   Public protection and education with EFT 648--654
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   D. B. Parker   Vulnerabilities of EFTs to intentionally
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  caused losses  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654--660
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              K. L. Kraemer and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      K. Colton   Policy, values, and EFT research:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  anatomy of a research agenda . . . . . . 660--671
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. F. Shoch and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     J. A. Hupp   Measured Performance of an ETHERNET
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Local Network  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711--721
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 26,  Number 9, September, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Hanan Samet   A quadtree medial axis transform . . . . 680--693
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 33,  Number 6, June, 1990
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Peter K. Pearson   Fast Hashing of Variable-Length Text
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Strings  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677--680
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 33,  Number 8, August, 1990
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Daniel M. Sunday   A Very Fast Substring Search Algorithm   132--142
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Communications of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 34,  Number 11, November, 1991
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     I. Dittmer   Note on Fast Hashing of Variable Length
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Text Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  118
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Jacques Savoy   Note on Fast Hashing of Variable Length
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Text Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118--119
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  James Litsios   Note on Fast Hashing of Variable Length
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Text Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118--120
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Peter Pearson   Note on Fast Hashing of Variable Length
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Text Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  120
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Computing Surveys
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 6,  Number 4, December, 1974
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Donald E. Knuth   Structured Programming with go to
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261--301
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Journal of the ACM
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 23,  Number 1, January, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Susan L. Graham and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    Mark Wegman   A Fast and Usually Linear Algorithm for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Global Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . 172--202
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Management Science
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 19,  Number , , 1972
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    R. J. Brown   Chromatic scheduling and the chromatic
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  number problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451--463
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								SIAM Journal of Computing
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 6,  Number 2, June, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Donald E. Knuth and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               J. H. Morris and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    V. R. Pratt   Fast pattern matching in strings . . . . 323--350
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Software --- Practice and Experience
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 12,  Number 1, January, 1982
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                A. L. Tharp and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      K.-C. Tai   The practicality of text signatures for
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  accelerating string searching  . . . . . 35--44
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 1,  Number 3, September, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Ove Skovgaard   Remark on ``Algorithm 236: Bessel
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Functions of the First Kind [S17]''  . . 282--284
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Jayadev Misra   Remark on ``Algorithm 246: Graycode
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  [Z]''  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285--285
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 1,  Number 9, September, 1975
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Robert Feinstein   Remark on ``Algorithm 483: Masked
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Three-Dimensional Plot Program with
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Rotations [J6]'' . . . . . . . . . . . . 285--285
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 2,  Number 1, March, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  D. M. Boulton   Remark on ``Algorithm 434: Exact
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Probabilities for $R\times{C}$
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Contingency Tables [G2]''  . . . . . . . 108--108
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Lucian D. Duta   Remark on ``Algorithm 475: Visible
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Surface Plotting Program [J6]''  . . . . 109--110
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                G. M. White and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                S. Goudreau and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   J. L. Legros   Remark on ``Algorithm 479: A Minimal
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Spanning Tree Clustering Method [Z]''    110--111
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                    J. Pomeranz   Remark on ``Algorithm 487: Exact
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Cumulative Distribution of the
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Kolmogorov-Smirnov Statistic for Small
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Samples [S14]''  . . . . . . . . . . . . 111--111
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Robert Morris   Remark on ``Algorithm 490: The
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Dilogarithm Function of a Real Argument
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  [S22]''  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112--112
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 2,  Number 2, June, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Malcolm C. Pike and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Jennie SooHoo   Remark on ``Algorithm 179: Incomplete
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Beta Ratio [S14]'' . . . . . . . . . . . 207--208
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Michael R. Anderson   Remark on ``Algorithm 433: Interpolation
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  and Smooth Curve Fitting Based on Local
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Procedures [E2]''  . . . . . . . . . . . 208--208
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 2,  Number 3, September, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Alan M. Davies   Remark on ``Algorithm 450: Rosenbrock
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Function Minimization [E4]'' . . . . . . 300--301
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Theodore Brown   Remark on ``Algorithm 489: The Algorithm
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  SELECT --- for Finding the $i$th
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Smallest of $n$ Elements [M1]''  . . . . 301--304
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 2,  Number 4, December, 1976
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      M. R. Ito   Remark on ``Algorithm 284: Interchange
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  of Two Blocks of Data [K2]'' . . . . . . 392--393
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Mohamed el Lozy   Remark on ``Algorithm 299: Chi-Squared
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Integral [S15]'' . . . . . . . . . . . . 393--395
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Henk Koppelaar and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 Peter Molenaar   Remark on ``Algorithm 486: Numerical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Inversion of Laplace Transform [D5]''    395--396
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 3,  Number 1, March, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								               Esko G. Cate and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 David W. Twigg   Algorithm 513: Analysis of In-Situ
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Transposition [F1] . . . . . . . . . . . 104--110
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            Fran\ccoise Veillon   Remark on ``Algorithm 486: Numerical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Inversion of Laplace Transform'' . . . . 111--111
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 3,  Number 2, June, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                J. K. M. Jansen   Remark on ``Algorithm 259: Legendre
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Functions for Arguments Larger than
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  One''  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204--250
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 3,  Number 3, September, 1977
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   Paolo Sipala   Remark on ``Algorithm 408: A Sparse
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Matrix Package (Part I) [F4]'' . . . . . 303--303
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Dennis Tenney   Remark on ``Algorithm 219: Topological
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Ordering for PERT Networks'' . . . . . . 303--303
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 4,  Number 1, March, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                  Ove Skovgaard   Remark on ``Algorithm 149: Complete
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Elliptic Integral [S21]''  . . . . . . . 95--95
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 4,  Number 3, September, 1978
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                John P. Coleman   Remark on ``Algorithm 49: Spherical
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Neumann Function'' . . . . . . . . . . . 295--295
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Fred G. Gustavson   Remark on ``Algorithm 408: A Sparse
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Matrix Package (Part I) [F4]'' . . . . . 295--295
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								              Andrew Y. Schoene   Remark on ``Algorithm 435: Modified
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Incomplete Gamma Function [S14]''  . . . 296--304
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 5,  Number 2, June, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                Mohamed el Lozy   Remark on ``Algorithm 395: Student's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  $t$-Distribution'' and Remark on
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  ``Algorithm 396: Student's Quantiles
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  [S14]''  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238--239
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   K. O. Geddes   Remark on ``Algorithm 424:
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Clenshaw-Curtis Quadrature [O1]''  . . . 240--240
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 M. R. Anderson   Remark on ``Algorithm 474: Bivariate
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Interpolation and Smooth Surface Fitting
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Based on Local Procedures''  . . . . . . 241--241
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 5,  Number 4, December, 1979
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             Burton L. Leathers   Remark on ``Algorithm 513: Analysis of
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  In-Situ Transposition [F1]'' and Remark
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  on ``Algorithm 467: Matrix Transposition
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  in Place'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520--520
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								       A. C. M. van Swieten and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								            J. Th. M. de Hosson   Remark on ``Algorithm 475: Visible
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Surface Plotting Program'' . . . . . . . 521--523
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 6,  Number 3, September, 1980
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                   U. Harms and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								             H. Kollakowski and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                      G. Moller   Remark on ``Algorithm 408: A Sparse
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Matrix Package (Part 1) [F4]'' . . . . . 456--457
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 7,  Number 2, June, 1981
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     G. W. Hill   Remark on ``Algorithm 395: Student's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  $t$-Distribution'' . . . . . . . . . . . 247--249
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     G. W. Hill   Remark on ``Algorithm 396: Student's
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  $t$-Quantiles''  . . . . . . . . . . . . 250--251
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                 I. D. Hill and   
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                     M. C. Pike   Remark on ``Algorithm 299: Chi-Squared
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  Integral'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185--185
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								Volume 11,  Number 4, December, 1985
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                       M. C. Er   Remark on ``Algorithm 246: Graycode
							 | 
						||
| 
								 | 
							
								                                  [Z]''  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441--443
							 |